Digital Marketing Strategy: Sean Malarkey on How to Employ Smart Online Marketing to Create a Money Pillow

On this episode of the BrightIdeas podcast, we’re joined by Sean Malarkey, creator of a digital publishing and marketing company, and author of the blog and podcast The Money Pillow. Sean relies heavily on his team to help him run his digital publishing company so that he has plenty of time left to do important things such as surf daily from his home in Santa Barbara.

Do you think that his business might suffer without him spending much time running it each day? Not true. The company continues to return year over year growth of around 30%, and is set to gross approximately $2 million this year.

In other words, Sean has a great business that prospers without requiring much of his presence. You could almost say, it works while he sleeps! And yes, that’s what he was going for in this business, and also the concept he talks about with his guests on The Money Pillow podcast.

In this interview, you’ll hear Sean and I talk about:

  • (2:00) How his team helps him out
  • (4:00) An overview of his audience
  • (5:45) The Money Pillow
  • (12:20) His podcast launch
  • (17:00) An explanation of how he’s going to extract the Golden Nuggets from his past episodes
  • (20:30) How to monetize a podcast
  • (25:50) How he’s promoting his podcast
  • (29:00) How to decide if you should have a show
  • (31:00) How he finds his guests
  • (36:17) What his team looks like
  • (44:30) How he’s building his team
  • (49:20) Team-building advice
  • (1:00:00) An overview of the publishing company, and how he launched it
  • (1:08:00) How they are generating traffic and sales

Resources Mentioned

VA task manager2

More About This Episode

The Bright Ideas podcast is the podcast for business owners and marketers who want to discover how to use online marketing and sales automation tactics to massively grow their business.

It’s designed to help marketing agencies and small business owners discover which online marketing strategies are working most effectively today – all from the mouths of expert entrepreneurs who are already making it big.

Listen Now

Leave some feedback:

Connect with Trent Dyrsmid:

Transcript

Trent: Hey there, bright idea hunters. It’s Trent Dyrsmid here. I am

the host of the Bright Ideas Podcast, and this is the podcast

for really whip-smart entrepreneurs who want to know how to use

online marketing and marketing automation to massively boost

their business.On the show with me today is a guy who is definitely a whip-

smart entrepreneur. His name is Sean Malarkey. He’s the guy

behind the Money Pillow, which is a new podcast. He’s also got a

book for it. The Money Pillow is definitely not Sean’s first

rodeo. He actually runs a very successful online digital

publishing business that works with content experts, and takes

their knowledge, and makes it available to business owners like

yourself who want to get better in a specific area of their

business.Now, I am super stoked to have Sean on the show because he is

doing some really cool things with the Money Pillow podcasts and

the guests that he’s unearthing. In particular, we’re going to

talk about how he launched the podcast and made it so incredibly

successful so very quickly. With that said, please join me in

welcoming Sean to the show. Hey, Sean. Welcome to the show.

Sean: Thanks for having me, man. It’s an honor to be here.

Trent: Absolutely. It’s an honor to have you on here. For the folks

who have not had the privilege of speaking with you off the air

for the last 45 minutes, maybe you would be so kind as to

introduce yourself and tell us a little bit about what you’re

doing.

Sean: Sure. My name is Sean Malarkey and GQ just voted me one of the

top 50 most handsome men in the world. No, I’m just kidding. I

have a really boring story, I guess. I don’t where to even

begin, but what I do now is I have a publishing company and a

marketing company. We publish and market digital trainings, so

we find experts that are good with particular things, and we

have them create the content, and then we take that content,

package it up in a pretty UI/UX, and then we push it out to our

audience, and market it, and sell it. We’ve got a handful of

people that we publish. Then we also have a marketing side where

we have our own audience that we market these products to, and

other ones as well.

It’s an all-in marketing or digital publishing business that

I’ve had now, I guess, Trent, for just past four years. I think,

this year, we should cross just over $2 million in sales, and

we’ve been growing at about 30% year over year pretty

consistently.

Trent: That’s not a bad little business to have that you can run from

anywhere in the world and spend quite a bit of time surfing

every day.

Sean: Yeah. It’s funny. I used to live in Columbus, Ohio, and a year

ago we moved out to California, and prior to moving out here,

the move was going to cost me $50,000 to $60,000, I think, in

total, all things considered. I just thought, “I’m going to

hustle, work hard, earn some extra money.” In about 75 days I

worked really hard in the business and did that, but what

happened was I had to rely on my team in ways that I never had

to do a lot of the things that I was doing on a daily basis.

When I got out here, I was busy unpacking and just getting

settled, and doing this, and doing that, and my team would say,

“Well, why don’t you let me do this for you? Why don’t you let

me do that for you?” I was holding them up on the tasks that I

always do. I would say, “Oh, yeah. You did do that once or twice

in the last month. Go ahead and then, when you’re done, let me

know and I’ll review it.”

What I ended up finding within like a month of being here was

that 95% of the things that I was doing on a day to day basis in

my business, I had basically by default trained somebody on my

team how to do during that phase of hustle. I just started

delegating more and more to them and letting them take ownership

more and more. For a good eight months, I just worked about an

hour a day, and some days I didn’t even work at all. Many days I

didn’t work at all, and then some days I’d work for three or

four hours, and then just crushed it. I realized after being out

here and being surrounded by…

Trent: Opulence.

Sean: Opulence is a great word, yes. That I kind of wanted a little

bit more out of life, and wanted to kind of also create more

freedom. For me, money represents freedom, and I wanted more

freedom. I really enjoyed having the ability to do what I want

when I want, and wanted to kind of indulge myself in the finer

things in life, a little bit finer than what I have now, so I

got back to work back in May. I’ve been working about eight to

ten hours a day since then.

One of the big things that got, Trent, is I’ve got a really good

audience, and I feel like I’ve got several different businesses

that I really want to launch and kind of capitalize on that

audience before that audience ages, if you will, and their

attention goes somewhere else. I know I have this window of time

that I really have to sit down and hustle if I want to take

advantage of the opportunity, or later I’m going to have to work

much harder to achieve the same results.

Trent: There are a lot of things, dear audience, that I want to cover

for you guys in this episode with Sean. Just so that you know

what’s coming, because I know that everybody’s time is at a

premium and you’re listening to this going, “What am I going to

get out of this?” Sean has launched a podcast recently called

The Money Pillow, which has been going very well. He’s getting a

ton of downloads, and he’s doing some really interesting things

to promote it. We’re going to talk about that a bunch.

I also want to talk a bit more about the outsourcing. You

referenced your team a lot, Sean, in what you just said, and I

think a lot of people, self included, would love to be able to

have a team that can do more for them, but the stumbling block,

especially for people who don’t yet have a surplus of cash flow,

is how I pay for that. How do I actually make that happen? I

want to come back to talk about that, so I’m going to put that

on my list.

Then, if we have time, for the end, I’d like to actually come

back to your publishing business because it is such a compelling

model that I think anyone who is a reasonably bright internet

marketer… Sorry. I want to erase that. Online marketer. I hate

the term internet marketer because it suggests that you’re

selling snake oil and getting rich quick, and I don’t believe in

any of that crap.

Sean: It has a stigma attached to it, huh?

Trent: It does, so let’s talk about an online marketer, or maybe we

should coin a new term. Let’s call it New Age Marketer. That’s

not going to stick.

Sean: New Media Marketer.

Trent: I like that. That’s much better. New Media Marketer.

Sean: It’s good, isn’t it?

Trent: It is. It doesn’t have any of that negative connotation.

Sean: You heard it here first, folks.

Trent: Absolutely. On the Bright Ideas Podcast. I’m making notes and

then we’re going to talk about the publishing business. I think

that is more than enough conversation to talk us well past the

deadline that I’m sure we both have for this. With all that

said, that’s what you’re going to get in this episode, so stay

tuned because here we go. Sean, what is The Money Pillow, first

of all? People need to know what that is.

Sean: It’s a concept, I guess. It started for me, in my brain, many

years ago, but essentially, it’s just a concept of creating a

great business that prospers without you having to be present at

the time.

I had this idea when I was 18 years old. I worked at a

skateboard shop, and the owner lived in Hawaii and came twice a

year. He drew a salary of $10,000 a month, had an AmEx card that

my managers were always making payments on, and this guy, for

years, would just kind of come and go a couple times a year.

Sometimes he wouldn’t even show up. I just thought, “Man, this

guy is living the dream. He built it, got a couple of post-

college guys to manage it, and he’s gone.” I was really, at an

early age, kind of fascinated by that.

Then I started a real estate company several years ago. Left

that to kind of pursue the business I’m in now and get a little

bit more freedom. Along the way, I’ve just met so many amazing

entrepreneurs who just have these businesses. With the

technology and the way the world is today, it’s a whole lot

easier to build a business with automation and tools and things

that, 10 years ago, it wasn’t possible. Five years ago it wasn’t

possible.

With The Money Pillow, it’s a book that I’m actually going to

write. Starting back in December 2012 I started interviewing a

lot of people that had these kinds of businesses. In fact, the

first interview I did was with Melanie and Devin Duncan. They

own a company called Custom Greek Threads. They live in New York

City. The business is in San Diego. I think they have close to

30 employees. It’s probably 40 by now. They’re growing. They’ve

not been in their office in over a year. Devin, by himself,

manages that company in four to five hours a month in work, and

the company has grown year over year at like 25% to 30%. I think

this year they’ll do $2.5 to $3 million in revenue.

Anyway, I’ve just met all these amazing entrepreneurs and it’s

not people in the new media marketing space, for the most part.

It’s all over the place. People that manufacture products,

people that have services, people that… I interviewed somebody

that has a chain of spas that she lives in Colorado, and her

spas are in Portland. Another guy who had a software company.

You just name it. The business models. Anything you can think of

people have applied The Money Pillow principle to so that

they’re able to kind of live life on their terms, and their

business runs and makes money while they do what they want.

Trent: That’s a nice way to live.

Sean: Yeah, it really is.

Trent: I think, especially for the younger generation who haven’t

grown up with the… I’m going to use the term “brainwashing.”

I’m sure someone will be upset by this, but go to college, get a

good job, work there for a long time mentality. I think that’s

just not part of the psyche of a lot of the younger generation.

I think this opportunity that’s there for us as a result of the

internet, and tools, and automation is absolutely wonderful.

Sean: Yeah. I think, in fact, that mentality is probably a minority.

I don’t know, but it would be interesting to see some high

school exit studies. How many of them feel like their careers

are going to be based on what they learn in college or how many

of them are just going kind of to appease their parents. It’s

definitely a different world that we live in.

Trent: It is indeed. The Money Pillow podcast, you’ve had a lot of

success fairly quickly. Do you want to talk about the results

first so people can know what we’re talking about?

Sean: Sure. These aren’t typical…

Trent: The results that you are about to hear are not typical.

Sean: Just throw a disclaimer out there. That’s so dumb. No,

literally, I launched it back in July. I launched it in, I’m

thinking, late June and then iTunes screwed up my feed. It was

saying the interviews were an hour and a half long. They were

actually only 30 minutes, and all these weird things were

happening. Descriptions weren’t showing, so we ended up having

to delete the feed and resubmit it. I can’t even remember when

that was. I think it was mid-July.

I launched it, and it was generating a couple hundred downloads

a day. I just told some friends, basically, about it on

Facebook, which I’ve got a fairly large Facebook audience, so

that helped a lot, but I have a lot of other assets I didn’t

really tap into. Told some friends about it on Facebook. It was

generating 200, 300, 400 downloads a day. Probably about 250 to

300, somewhere in there.

Then once I kind of felt like I had enough episodes in there…

I launched, I think, with six episodes, and once I got to the 10

episode mark, I decided it was a good time to email my list. I

emailed my list, and that jumped it up, that day, to like 2,100

downloads that day. From that point on, it pretty much has

stayed over 1,000 downloads. I think it was July 11 that I

launched, and we are what? August 19 today, or the 18?

Trent: Nineteenth.

Sean: August 19. I think I’m at 38,000 downloads now with probably

30,000 of those coming in August. Actually, I can tell you.

Thirty-seven thousand five hundred, with 26,878 in August. I had

some good fortune along the way. Stitcher featured me on their

front page, and just some random interesting things happening,

but it’s been growing really well. I feel like I hit number two

in business which was a big boost that day. Introduced me to a

lot of people who had no idea who I was, and created a lot of

new fans.

My goal is to get it to, by the end of September, 100,000

downloads a month, or 3,000 a day. I think I can hit that. It’s

just a matter of figuring this whole game out. For me, I was

doing all these interviews already for the book, and I had this

content. With my marketing business, I brought somebody on who

was a podcasting expert because I thought it was a cool idea.

She had a great presentation, and a good product, so I brought

her on. As I was listening to her thing I was like, “Man, this

is stupid. I’ve got all this content I can repurpose, and with

doing so, I can build an audience for the book that’s focused

exactly on the topic of the book.” Again, I thought I’ll just

give the podcast the same exact name of the book, and blah,

blah, blah. That’s what I did, and that’s what I’m doing.

My hope is that by doing this, I can build a really large

audience that’s interested in the topic. You’ll see, going

forward, I’m going to start structuring the content. Instead of

just doing interviews, now I’m going to start bringing in a lot

of content that will be featured in the book. I’m going to be

taking the past 15 interviews, and I’m going to be doing

highlight moments where the most important, or most valuable

lessons that people need to learn, or more than I think have

been shared so far when it comes to running an automated or

hands-off business, I’ll be highlighting those and talking some

theoretical talk behind what the person shared. Kind of

structuring it a little bit better and prepping the audience for

the book. My hope with doing that is that it will result in a

big push on the book, and I hope to hit the bestseller list when

it launches.

Trent: That’s a good idea that you just mentioned, and it’s something

that I’ve thought of doing because I’m like 65 or 70 episodes

deep now, and there’s so much good stuff in that. When you do

like you and I do, and you have really top-notch entrepreneurs

on your show, there’s what I call golden nuggets. There’s a

bunch of them in every interview. I’ve forgotten more of those

golden nuggets than probably anybody, and I’ve been on every

show. I’ve heard every one of my shows, and I’m still not using

everything that I should have learned. I’ve been thinking about

doing the same thing you have.

How are you going to do that? Are you going to have a person on

your team sort of sit down and listen to them all, or did you

make really incredible show notes? How are you going to go back

through? I guess you probably don’t have 70 episodes yet, but

you’re what? At 16, 17, something like that. Can you talk a

little bit about the process of how you’re going to unearth

those gems, and then how you’re going to repurpose that?

Sean: Yeah. I’m sitting here chuckling because I can’t wait to tell

you. It’s not that I’m lazy, I’m just really busy and I don’t

have time to go back and listen to all of them, and I did not

take good notes. There are key moments for me that I really

remember.

For example, I interviewed this one guy and he talked about a

product idea that he had, but in order to sell this product, he

had to manufacture it. In order to manufacture it, there was a

large investment into manufacturing. Not large, but $2,000,

$3,000, or $4,000 into getting his first batch of products to

sell. The way he decided to test this to see if this was even

going to be a good idea was he spent three, four hours, or paid

somebody to build a simple little sales page and then ran Google

Ads to that sales page. When people clicked the Buy Now button,

people went to a page that just said, “We’re sorry. This product

is actually not available right now. We’ll let you know when it

is.” All he was doing was trying to measure if this was a

successful business. Does that make sense?

Trent: Yeah.

Sean: There are like three or four moments that really stand out like

that for me, but I need more than three or four. Yesterday I

just emailed my email list. It’s a small email list, but what

I’ve built from the website that’s coming there, and just said,

“What was your biggest aha moment?” It said, “I’m putting

together…” I literally am getting responses. I got one after

we started talking.

The email said, and this is all totally true and transparent,

“Yesterday I was at the beach hanging out with some friends. One

of them brought up how you’ve been listening to my podcast. We

started talking about different episodes. He began telling me a

few aha moments that he had while he was listening, things he

could implement into his business right away, and this got me

thinking maybe I should do a highlight episode.” I told, in the

email, the story of Daniel, and his little manufacturing

validation test. I said, “My question to you is what has been

your biggest aha moment? Reply back and let me know, and I will

also give you credit in that episode.”

I thought this was kind of a way to get my audience involved and

do some work for me, and then I can give them credit on the

episode, so 2,000 or 3,000 people will hear me say, “This next

part came from Trent. Trent replied back to the email and said

his biggest aha moment was this. Here you go.” That’s how I did

  1. I’ve gotten about 40 emails. Now I have to decipher which

ones to actually feature and use.

Trent: That was a very good idea. That will be what we call one of the

golden nuggets of this episode.

Sean: There you go.

Trent: From yours truly. I have to say that word good and clear,

golden nuggets, so that when it gets transcribed and a person on

my team is searching for golden nuggets in episodes to do our

compilation post, they’ll find it.

Sean: There you go.

Trent: All right. I want to take a quick sidebar because some people

who are listening to this, there may be many, don’t really

understand the business model of a podcast. There are a number

of reasons why you could do it. In your case, you’re doing it,

it sounds like, to promote your book, maybe build your audience.

Some people do it because they want to get advertiser income,

and then other people do it because they want to build

authority. I’m interested in your take. If there’s either

nuances that I’ve missed, details that I’ve missed, or what have

you, but what is the business model of the podcast?

Sean: You just hit on, really, all the big ones. They’re all

possible, and they’re all totally achievable. I know people that

have hit all those things. For me, I honestly, Trent, didn’t

realize you could monetize it. It was just a way for me… I was

going to monetize this, but not directly. When I say monetize, a

lot of people earn good revenue from show sponsors, and once you

get to 2,000 or 4,000 downloads per episode, it’s pretty easy to

start earning a decent living from sponsors. That’s a lot of

eyeballs, or ears if you will, that these sponsors will get

depending on what you’re talking about. There are probably

people that have products or services that want people to hear

that. I had no idea you could do that.

It was just literally for me just to build an audience for the

book, which I knew I could monetize in the sense that if I could

go to a publisher… When you get a book published, most of the

time you get an advance or often you’ll get an advance. I’ve got

a fairly large social reach. I’ve got a big email list, and I’ve

got a business that sells $100 products and up, so all that

stuff has a lot of value to the publisher. I may be able to

generate $50,000 to $200,000 in advance, $300,000 with good

agents, somewhere in there. I have no idea. This is just what

agents are telling me that I’ve interviewed and talked to.

I thought to myself, “Well, if I had the number one or number

two podcast out there with the exact name and content that’s

going to be in the book, and I build a big audience, I could

show lots of downloads, and subscribers, and build an email list

off that, that would probably be worth as much as everything

else I just mentioned that I have as an asset to the publisher.”

With that said, I thought I could probably double my advance.

For me, getting a big advance represents the fact that the

publisher… Not only will it be great money, it will be cool to

put a big check in the bank, but the publisher will really put

their weight behind the book to make sure they see a return on

their money, which means prominent placement in all the book

shelves in all the airports, and all the book stores that still

remain, and any other kind of marketing you can think of.

They’re going to throw their weight behind it because they want

it to generate a return on their investment.

Which then means it makes it, in my opinion, that much easier to

get to the New York Times bestseller list, which means it makes

it easier to sell more books, and at the end of the day, I

really feel like this topic is going to change people’s lives in

a major way and have a huge impact. It’s something that’s kind

of a personal project for me that I really kind of want to leave

my mark on the world, and this is one way, I think, that I’ll do

that.

Trent: Now, do you thing that you’re actually going to make really

good money from the book, or is the book a means to yet another

end?

Sean: I don’t know. Originally, it was a means to an end. I’ve got an

iPhone app that I’m working on and I thought, “I need about

$100,000 to get this app complete, and if I can get my book, get

an advance, I can get that covered.” I’m fairly confident I can

get $50,000 to $100,000 worth of current asset that I’ve got in

the book topic, and in a number of things. Then, I just started

seeing the potential in this.

I’m not in a hurry to write the book. I’m in a hurry to get the

podcast to find 10,000 downloads an episode because then, at

that point, I will then approach the publishers about signing a

deal. I got the iPhone app part figured out, so I’m not as

motivated by that, but I don’t know.

Trent, it’s one of those things that could totally flop or it

could be the next big book that leads into a whole other line of

things.

Trent: That’s the interesting thing about succeeding in public, or

even demonstrating your expertise in public, by way of a book, a

blog, or a podcast, is the people that you don’t even know exist

know you exist, and some of them will come to you with

opportunities as a result of the exposure you create for

yourself.

Sean: Absolutely. Who knows, man? It could be a total failure, and

hell, I may never even get it done. If the iPhone app gets

completed before the book thing and that takes off, great. Or if

my business takes… You never know, but it will get done at

some point, I’m sure. I feel fairly confident I can get it to

bestseller status. If not, I’ll just have to put my tail between

my legs and walk away from it.

Trent: I have several chapters of my book done, and they’ve been

collecting dust for a while.

Sean: Yeah, I hear you.

Trent: It’s tough to stay focused.

Sean: It’s amazing, too, when somebody gives you a big check of money

and how motivating that can be.

Trent: Well, yeah. Suddenly then you’ve got skin in the game and

you’re also being held accountable times 10.

Back to my first bullet point, then, of this interview is

talking about the podcast. Now, I know that you’ve done some

pretty interesting things to promote it, so not everybody has a

big list. Not everybody has the social reach, so that’s all

great and good for you. For the folks that don’t have that, but

they do have a desire, and anyone can interview people just like

you and I do, so I don’t think that you have to be a rocket

scientist to do that. You just have to have the desire to do it,

but promoting it. You’re doing some cool stuff on Facebook, so

do you want to talk a little bit about what you’re doing there?

Sean: Yeah. I wanted to know that this podcast had kind of reached

every corner of the earth, and I noticed one day that the first

time I looked at the stats, I saw that I had hit like 88 or 95

of the world’s 195 countries. I just thought, “Man, that would

be kind of cool to say that somebody in every country in the

world is listening to my podcast.” I just started running ads. I

just started targeting every country that I hadn’t gotten

downloads from, and that’s been a big boost in subscriptions and

likes on Facebook, on the page.

In just two weeks, I think it’s… Not organically because I’ve

been paying for the traffic, but for 50 bucks a day, I have

gotten… Well, I can just tell you. I’m looking at it right

now. I’ve spent $600 and have 1,227 fans right now, and it’s

probably sent over 3,000 clicks to iTunes, which I don’t know

how many of those become subscribers and download. It’s a

nominal cost. I think I’m paying, on average, including the

United States, I do marketing to the United States, Canada,

U.K., and Australia, which are the big markets for me, including

those and with all the other countries I’m marketing to, I’m

probably at 10 to 15 cents a click right now. I think that’s

been a big push to it.

Then, also, just leveraging my personal network on Facebook has

been really big as well. I haven’t done this yet. I have this

game plan. We talked about it earlier, that we don’t have to get

into now, but as soon as I am ready to kind of just go all out,

I will then go back and ask everybody that I’ve interviewed to

share it. I’m also connected to a lot of influencers over the

last few years. I’ve been earning a lot of reciprocity, or I

hope that I have, by constantly promoting and sharing their

stuff.

I will then, when I’m ready, I want to make an all-out assault

on Dave Ramsey and that number one spot in business. It’s going

to be very coordinated, and I’m going to be bringing in every

weapon that I’ve got, but I’ll be reaching out to all the

influencers, I’ll crank up the ads that day, I’ll email my list,

and basically just abuse all my friends in social media and real

life, and ask them to help with that mission, and we’ll see what

happens.

Trent: This is kind of a piggyback on my question about the business

model. I have a lot of people in my audience who are marketing

consultants, run a marketing agency, or a small business of some

kind, that it may not have occurred to them that they should

have a podcast. Do you think they should?

Sean: I guess it just depends. For me, it’s so easy to generate this

kind of content. I can do two episodes or three episodes a week

in a couple hours a week. Trent, this conversation we’re having

is not like work, if you will. It’s not like traditional work?

For me, this is educational for me to do podcasts. When I

interview these people and they’re sharing with me how they

built their entire business, and their exact model, and what led

to this major increase here, and this and that, I’m getting like

a free education from somebody who has been there and done that,

and at the same time, I’m taking that content and using it for

the podcast.

For me, it’s easy, so if you have the time, and the energy, and

access, or have places you can find people to interview, to

feature, if you want to do interviews, I would say absolutely. I

don’t see any reason why not.

I think iTunes features just about every new podcast that comes

out in new and noteworthy. You got there. I got there. That just

exposes you to an audience that you don’t have currently. I

think with a simple game plan, you can do it, and build a good

audience. I think the audience always equates to value, so

there’s nothing wrong with building an audience. You’re

basically just building your own personal value further, so I

would say yeah. I don’t see any reason why not.

Trent: It really doesn’t take a whole lot of time to do these

interviews, folks. If you think that there’s like a ton of prep

work… I’m going to go on record here. Sean, do you know how

much prep I did for this interview? Zero.

Sean: I can tell from your questions, zero. No, I’m kidding.

Trent: Normally, I do actually put about a half hour into prep, but as

I mentioned to you off-air, my wife and I are moving at the end

of this week up to Boise, and I’ve had no time. I am so far

behind between packing boxes…

Sean: You don’t even need to. That’s the thing, though. We chatted

for 10, 15 minutes. You probably had everything you needed to

know, and we got rolling, and here we are. It’s not difficult.

Trent: Yeah, I agree. Where do you find your guests?

Sean: That’s a good question. A couple of different places, but I’m

in a couple entrepreneur groups on Facebook that are private

groups, so originally I reached out to those guys. I offered

just to interview any of them because everybody in that group is

an entrepreneur. There are 200 guys I’m in this group with, and

everybody in there is an entrepreneur. Most of them have mid-six

figure to mid-seven figure businesses, and some even eight- and

nine-figure businesses. I got about a dozen interviews out of

those guys.

Then that led here, and there, and there, and then I reached

back out to everybody and said, “Hey, I’m looking for new

guests. If you know, great.” Then I have another friend who runs

a big female entrepreneur association. I had her reach out and

got about 10 different females to interview from that.

I just went to where they hung out, and relied on some friends,

or relied on the audience, I guess, just to help me kind of

source that. For me, it’s pretty easy. I can probably just go to

Inc., Fast Company, or Forbes. I haven’t done this yet because I

haven’t needed to, but I could just dig through their issues

online or in print, and find great people. People’s success

stories are…

Trent: Everywhere.

Sean: Exactly.

Trent: There are not too many people who are successful who don’t want

to talk about it.

Sean: Exactly. These guests, people are always like, “I can’t believe

they revealed this information to you,” and this and that. I’m

going through it, I guess, myself right now, and no one ever

takes the time to care how you got to where you got. When you

take an interest in somebody, you want to know their story. It’s

just unbelievable to me the amount that they vomit out.

Trent: It is the best free education going. A case in point about how

easy it is to get guests. Had you heard of me before I sent you

a tweet?

Sean: No, I hadn’t.

Trent: There you go. I got 140 characters to get Sean on the show, and

I suckered him into it.

Sean: You did a good job. It’s been interesting. I’ve been so behind

the scenes for so long that since I started this podcast, I’ve

been getting three or four a week, and I just thought well,

screw it. I’m just going to use that time to make some new

friends and spread the word a little bit further.

Trent: Absolutely.

Sean: Anybody listening could probably shoot me a message. You have

three listeners that will probably jump on to it.

Trent: All right. Did you talk about geotargeting in the Facebook

thing we just talked about?

Sean: Yeah.

Trent: You did? All right, so we talked about monetizing it, we talked

about how you promoted it to your list. Here’s my show prep for

you. Is there anything that I missed with respect to how you

promoted your podcast to get to where you’re at?

Sean: Probably. There’s probably stuff I’ve forgotten. Can I point

people to that post I wrote?

Trent: Yeah.

Sean: Is that lame to do with your audience, or your show?

Trent: No. Hijack away, man.

Sean: I just wrote a post where I sat down one night and I knew it

would get my friends interested, and my community more

interested in it, so I wrote a post where I just revealed

everything. If you go to TheMoneyPillow.com it’s there. I think

I’m going to continue doing that. I would recommend Trent, or

even listeners, doing the same. People are really excited about

the transparency and love it, and as long as this thing

continues to succeed, I’ll do it.

Trent: Yeah, I think it’s a great idea, and it’s something that I

think I’ve mentioned in past episodes. My wife, she’s an

entrepreneur as well, and we’ve decided to start the Bright

Ideas Agency, and she’s going to run it, not me. I’m kind of in

the advisory capacity. We’re going to have an online dialogue,

it’s going to be on the blog, and we’re going to write about

stuff that we’re doing to get customers, and stuff we’re doing

to use marketing automation, and all sorts of stuff. I think

that people love to have the ability to look over someone’s

shoulder who has either had the courage to forge ahead and do

something they haven’t done yet, or maybe do something that

they’ve already done. Doing it again, but for the person looking

over their shoulder, it’s a huge value to be able to do that.

Sean: Huge. Yeah, I’ve gotten so much good feedback. Then what ended

up happening, too, is I got a lot of really important

podcasters, like Libsyn, the hosting company, and a couple other

people just shared that blog post, which drove a bunch of new

traffic. Well, not a bunch, but probably 500 to 1,000 hits to my

site. Not that much. Probably 300 to 500, but I got a bunch of

email and comments that I had never seen before, so I’m going to

keep it going. I’m going to keep just being transparent and

sharing that stuff. Like I said, as long as it’s successful. If

it starts failing, I don’t want to admit that I’ve failed.

Trent: That is the double-edged sword of all that transparency.

Sean: I’m kidding. I will, and I’ll probably have all kinds of great

excuses as to why it happened.

Trent: Oh, of course. My computer broke down. My dog ate my homework,

and stuff like that, yeah. Off the podcast. On to what I talked

about in the beginning. I promised that I would ask you about

the team. Of course, I’m very selfishly interested in this as

well. I have a team, but I want to know what does your team look

like? How many people are on it? Are they full time? Are they

all overseas contractors? Can you walk us through it?

Sean: How it looks now, and it was completely different six months

ago, or not completely, but for the most part… Forever, I had

a virtual team. When I lived in Columbus, for a couple of years

we had an office with people and then we moved to virtual, so

for two years I ran it with a team out of Kentucky of six that

did everything from graphics to copywriting to shopping cart

integrations. They did everything you can think of. Literally

everything, and there wasn’t anything they didn’t know. If they

didn’t know it, they’d learn it, and they were really good.

Trent: Were these full-time people, or were they independent

contractors?

Sean: Everybody I have is independent contractors. Now I have some

employees, but at that point everybody I had was independent

contractors. I had a team of six in Kentucky who did a lot of

stuff, and I’d say out of that six, two worked for me pretty

much full time and four were part time. What I mean by that is

one guy did graphics for 10 to 15 hours a week. Somebody else

did transcription and audio/video stuff for another 10 or 15

hours, etc.

I have a part-time person who has been with me pretty much since

day one. My very first employee, or contractor, and she is in

New York. She does all of our customer support and a lot of kind

of general admin and assistant-type stuff. I have a bookkeeper

that lives in Iowa, and she’s the bookkeeper, but also just does

all of our finances, manages everything.

Trent: I’m sorry. Is she looking for clients? I need a bookkeeper.

Sean: Do you? I might be able to refer you.

Trent: Please do.

Sean: I’d be happy to.

Trent: Thank you.

Sean: We’ll talk off-air about that, but yeah, I would be happy to.

She does everything for me, and then also does a bunch of other

stuff within the business as well. General kind of assistant or

admin stuff as well. Then, outside of that, probably a dozen

contractors that I call on multiple times a year for different

projects. That was it.

Then recently, as I started to get busy again at the end of May,

I got kind of frustrated with some delays that were going on

between customer support, or design, or this or that. The other

thing was I’m in California now and after 2:00 pm, I couldn’t

contact my team on the East Coast, in Kentucky, or in Eastern

Standard Times. That was really frustrating because I would surf

until 11:00 and then get out of the water, have some lunch, and

then I’d have about an hour where I could communicate with them.

An hour or two after I got to work I couldn’t call them anymore,

so I was like this sucks.

Then I started noticing some things. I think I was delegating

too much to them and things were starting to fall by the wayside

here and there. Ninety percent of it got done, and got done

brilliantly, but there was this 10% here or there that just

bothered me. I would be the one clogging the chain, and then

they were so busy they wouldn’t follow up with me on it. They’d

send me an email about something, and I’d never respond. I’d

looked at it and then forgot to mark it as unread, and I had

forgotten about it. A month later I’d be like, “Hey, whatever

happened to this or that?” and they’d be like, “Oh, well we

emailed you and you never responded.” I’m like, “In the past you

would follow up the next day, or the next day, and the next day.

‘Hey, what’s up?'” and they got so busy you stopped doing it.

I got kind of frustrated and said, “I’m going to hire a local

team and I’m going to put a giant white board on the wall where

I can write all these things down and hold them accountable.”

That’s essentially what I did. It’s worked out brilliantly

because, having the same people… I haven’t had this in so

long, where people are in the same room. The customer service

person can complain to the tech guy about a technical issue and

in 10 minutes he can fix something that’s been a frustration for

two years for our customer support staff. It’s been great having

some synergy with the same people in the room.

I think I’ve cut that portion of the employment cost in half,

and I’m probably getting twice the production out of them. I’ve

got people that are more… Literally, the developer and the IT

guy I have are probably five times as skilled as anybody I’ve

ever worked with.

Trent: Oh, that’s nice. Can I give you an idea that I discovered a few

years ago for, I call it, my task management dashboard?

Sean: Sure.

Trent: Everyone I explain this to freaks out, so I’m going to share it

with you because hopefully it will be useful to you. I have a

Google doc I’ve had for years, so it’s shared. Obviously anyone

who is working for me anywhere in the world… I do this for my

wife as well because she runs the business with me. Things fall

through the crack in email. It’s hopeless. It’s color coded, so

every column is…

Like for me, I have episodes. All my shows. Each show is one

column, and then, in the rows on the left are all of the tasks

involved with pre-production, post-production, promotion, blah,

blah, blah, that we have to do over and over with each episode.

Then, it’s divided into whose section, so I’m like the top two

rows, which is like “record episode,” and then my wife has some

stuff, and then our overseas VA has some stuff.

It’s all color coded. Blue square means “hey, there’s a new

thing you’ve got to do.” Yellow means it’s in progress. Red

means there’s a problem, and green means it’s done. Any person

who has access to that visual dashboard can instantly see the

status of kind of everything because the colors really stand

out.

Sean: Wow. That is pretty trippy. You have that in a Google doc, you

said?

Trent: Yeah. Just put it in a Google doc and then what you can do is

get your people to subscribe for updates, so my VA, every time I

do anything, Google doc sends her an email saying something

changed. All she has to do is log on and look for more blue

squares for her because that means more new tasks. Then, I can

see how burdened she is or isn’t by the number of blue squares

relative to the number of green squares, which are tasks that

are done.

If there’s a problem, she changes it to red and puts in the

comments of the cell whatever the issue is, and then I can go

and solve it and change it back to blue or yellow again.

Sean: Did you say it has… Like when you change the doc, it sends an

email notification automatically?

Trent: Yeah, it does. It’s just a built-in notification system that

Google offers.

Sean: Is that something you have to select?

Trent: Yeah.

Sean: We have a bunch of docs that we share, and I never get any

notifications.

Trent: It’s called “subscribe to changes.”

Sean: Oh, is that in there? Very cool. Yeah, that’s pretty smart. I

like that. It’s very sharp.

Trent: Yeah, because a white board is only good if you’re in the room,

right? This is kind of my digital task management dashboard.

Sean: Exactly, yeah. I love it. You know what you ought to do? You

ought to share that doc with your listeners, or share a dummy

doc.

Trent: I have.

Sean: Oh, you have?

Trent: I will do it again in the show notes for this episode, so if

you’re listening to this… What is the URL for this show going

to be? Give me half a second here, and I’ll tell you what number

it is. It’s going to be BrightIdeas.co slash something, and I’ve

just got to see what number I’m on. I’ll put it at the end of

the show as well, but just in case you’re listening right now,

which you are. Nothing like babbling while you’re interviewing.

I’m going to make this one number 71, so BrightIdeas.co/71, and

that will take you directly to the post. In that, I will put a

link to a screenshot of what I’ve just described.

Sean: Awesome.

Trent: I’ve got to make a note to myself. Link’s mentioned, so…

Sean: Yeah, that’s really smart. I did not know about that subscribe

to changes deal, and I can see how that could be powerful.

Trent: Yeah, it’s pretty cool. When the email goes out, it doesn’t say

what the changes are, it just says something… Or does it? I

can’t remember because I barely ever look at it because I’m not

the one receiving the emails. I’m the one that’s making the

changes that cause the emails to go out.

Sean: Got it.

Trent: The great thing is, do you know how much that costs to do?

Nothing. Thanks, Google.

Sean: Yeah, I love Google docs. Absolutely love it.

Trent: Back to the team. Where do you find the people that work for

you? Are you doing what everyone else does? You go and put a job

description, and you’re like super descriptive in what you want,

and you put it on oDesk, or Freelancer, or wherever, or are you

doing something that’s different than that?

Sean: For the virtual people, I just literally relied on referrals

for people that I had, friends that I had in the business

industry. Actually, the guy that ended up eventually creating

the team that I hired was somebody I’d met in a forum somewhere,

and he was just answering really smart responses to everything,

questions that I had, and other people. Then at one point, he

offered some services, and I hired him. He ended up becoming a

mentor for many years. I think I outgrew him as a mentor. That’s

the wrong choice of words, but I got to a level where that

portion wasn’t as valuable, but he always was just a sound guy,

and good advice.

Anyway, I found him through that forum. Everybody else was

mainly through referrals from friends. I would reach out and

say, “Hey, do you know somebody who can do this or that?” and

they’d refer them.

For the local people that I hired, I ran ads on Craigslist and

had a bitch of a time, excuse my language if there are kids

around, had a hard time getting people to even respond to my ad.

Santa Barbara has about a couple hundred thousand people in the

greater area, and when I ran the ad for a customer service

person, I had 50 responses in two days, and I had to take it

down. It was overwhelming. When I started running developer, and

IT, just specific niche job types of ads, I was getting two or

three responses a month. It started making me really nervous.

Then one day I went to run another ad because I’d gotten three

responses in a month, and none of them panned out. I went to the

section that I was going to be running the ad in, and I looked

at it, and I noticed all the ads looked exactly the same, so in

other words, they were like “web developer for tech company,” or

“front-end developer for whatever,” and blah, blah, blah.

I was like, “God, this is a good opportunity,” so I wrote an ad,

and the subject line of the ad was “Do You Build Great Shit?” In

parentheses, I put “WordPress, PHP, HTML, JAVA, etc.,” or

something like that, so that they knew when they saw “do you

build blah, blah, blah,” the stuff that was in parentheses was

the coding languages that they know.

The ad basically just said something along the lines of if you

build great shit, we want you. I think in my ad copy I wrote, “I

can write this whole long description of what we want, but

basically, we need you to be proficient in WordPress, this, and

that, and the other. We’re a four-year-old company. We do seven

figures in revenue. We’ve had a virtual staff forever. We’re

looking to hire on a local team. This is not a nine-to-five job.

We really are just focused on results. You can come and go as

you want as long as you’re getting the job done and keeping us

happy. If you want to work for a fun, cool company, and build

some great stuff together, hit reply.” That got 30 responses, I

think, in a week.

Trent: Nice.

Sean: Yeah, and I found the most amazing guy from that. What ended up

being the funniest thing, Trent, was I already actually knew

him. He was a good friend of mine’s brother, so I didn’t know

that. When he responded, I’m like, “Oh, my God, I know this

guy,” but he saw the ad and didn’t realize it was me posting it.

Trent: What kind of money are you paying for local talent to do

technical work like that?

Sean: He does development work, so he’s $5,000 a month. He’s worth

every penny. A lot of the activities I put him on generate

revenue, and he’s already done a couple things that are

generating more than his salary on autopilot basis by fixing

things and creating some good stuff.

Trent: Very nice. What advice would you give to somebody… I know

there are lots of people that are listening to this show that

are what I call a solo entrepreneur. They go get a client, then

they get immersed in fulfillment of the services that they’re

going to deliver to that client, then they get bogged down in

the bookkeeping because you’ve got to have bookkeeping, and

then, then, then, and then the job’s done, and they’re like,

“Oh, crap, I need another client,” and the cycle starts all over

again. Not a good hamster wheel to be on.

The reason they’re on it, it’s not like they’ve never heard of

this idea of outsourcing or building a team. I think, if I had

to guess, because I used to be that guy like over a decade ago

when I started my first business, you’re limited by this either

perceived or reality of constrained cash flow. “Oh, I can’t

afford it” is generally what the objection is. What advice would

you give to that person? Let’s just say that they’re generating,

I don’t know, $40,000, $50,000, $60,000 a year in billings for

their one-person shop.

Sean: What advice would I give them based on…

Trent: To build a team, yeah.

Sean: Yeah. There are three options, if you will. Number one, you can

keep doing what you’re doing and just hustle your ass off.

Sometimes it’s what you have to do because that’s the only way

you know out, and if that’s all you can do, that’s all you can

  1. You can generally make that work. It’s just a pain in the

ass, and then there’s an opportunity cost from all the time and

energy that you’re spending on that, and then all the mental

energy that you’re expending on that as opposed to revenue-

generating tasks.

Two is you can hire somebody cheap. When I first started, I ran

an ad. It’s a long story, but the person I ended up hiring, I

said, “I can’t pay you what you’re worth. I know you’re worth

more. I just don’t make enough now to pay you. If you’re willing

to come on now and work for less, I’ll take care of you later.”

She said, “I like you a lot, and I’d love to work for you even

it’s for less than what I’m worth. That’s fine.”

The reality is she still works for me to this day, four years

later, and she made my life so much easier so that I could start

focusing on growth and growth-producing tasks as opposed to

those kinds of tasks. To this day, she’s still with me, and she

probably makes three times what she’s worth now. I don’t mind

paying her because she’s incredibly loyal. I can call her at

midnight if I have a crisis. She’ll answer the phone and she’ll

help me out. I don’t do that, but she’s just an amazing person.

I overpay her now, but for years, I underpaid her, so I have no

issue with that.

People that are loyal, I don’t mind taking care of them. It’s

not that I overpay her. She works for what she earns, but I

could probably get somebody for half of what I pay her to do the

same work, but I don’t because she’s been incredibly loyal to me

and made some sacrifices to work for me early on, so I view it

as a good exchange.

Trent: Just in the interest of transparency because I’ve been a CEO

and had a staff and so forth, too, so for the folks to

understand this, it’s not that Sean’s super-duper altruistic.

It’s also there’s a massive pain to changing from someone who is

really good at what they do, and you have a relationship with,

and you know that when you assign them something it gets done to

trying to find someone who can do most of the stuff, and they

can do it, I can pay them half, blah, blah, blah. It sucks.

Sean: You never know what you’re going to get, too. You hire somebody

new and six months later they’re gone, and you have to do the

whole cycle over again, so there is a huge pain.

For me, this type of position that she does is fairly simple

stuff. I could, without much pain, replace her, but I never

would because she was so loyal to me early on, and amazing. My

thing now is I probably need to dedicate some time into getting

her to do some other things outside of what she’s doing because

she’s making more than she should, but in the meantime, I don’t

mind paying her what she gets for that reason.

That was the first two. You can do it yourself. You can pay

somebody. Offer to pay them cheap, and you’d be surprised, if

people like you, that they’ll do it.

The third thing is you can get somebody to do it for free. There

are interns that can do it. Interns are good, but you have that

pain point of losing them after a certain period of time, but if

the tasks are not that challenging, you can have an intern do

  1. Or, some sort of trade or exchange with somebody else.

Right now, for example, I have somebody that is like begging me

to do coaching with them, and I just don’t like doing consulting

or coaching-type work because I feel like I’m obligated and

blah, blah, blah, but she’s been a great customer. She’s been a

good friend in social media, and all this stuff.

I said, “Look, I’ll give you a 20-minute call on me. I’ve

appreciated all your support over the years, but that’s really

all I’ve got.” We start talking, she shared with me her whole

story, and it kind of pulled on some heartstrings. She had some

hardships. I realized I was in a position to kind of help her,

and I think I really, truly can change her life with some of the

direction that I’ll give her on what to do with her business

now.

I said, “I do need somebody to work on TheMoneyPillow.com and

format all this… The website right now, in its form, sucks. It

could be a whole lot better because I don’t have the time and

energy, and I haven’t found somebody to hire to do that, but if

you want to do it, I’ll do it, and I’ll give you a half hour

coaching a month, and we can talk here and there, back and

forth.” She’s just like, “I’d love to.” She’s doing it for me

for free and I’m giving her some value and exchanging some

advice or knowledge with her.

What I told her was, too, I said, “If you want to do this for

free, I’ll be happy to coach you and then, after 60 or 90 days,

if the podcasts are generating revenue, and you want to continue

to do it, I’ll be happy to pay you X amount of dollars to

continue doing it, but I won’t be coaching you at that point. I

don’t want to coach you beyond that point regardless.” She’s

just like, “Awesome. I’d love to do it as long as this isn’t

anything crazy, I’d love to do it, and get paid to do it in the

future,” so I’ll probably start paying her. She’s doing an

amazing job, and she’s going above and beyond, in the first few

days of working on it, beyond my expectations.

Those kind of exchanges work really well, and they work well for

  1. I don’t want to throw $1,000 to $1,500 a month at somebody

to publish the podcasts and do all this stuff on there. I’m not

doing all the video editing, and the audio editing, and all that

stuff now. I’m not taking the blog content and really filling it

out to the level it should be, so she’s willing to do it for

free, and I’m going to give her a half hour a month of my time,

probably an hour in total, I would assume, which is no big deal

because I like helping people. I just hate feeling obligated to

do it.

Trent: Is she doing the post-production editing and the video editing

for you?

Sean: No, I’ve got somebody else doing that. A guy that kind of owes

me some favors, if you will, so he’s been doing that for awhile,

and he’s happy to do it. We’ll end up working on some projects

in the future together, and he knows that, so he’s doing that.

What I’m going to do is the first 30 days she’s doing all of the

on-the-page content, and the second 30 days I’m going to have

him teach her how to do the actual audio and video editing.

Trent: That’s a fantastic idea. If there’s anybody listening to this

episode right now, I am looking for someone to do my post-

production and some of the website work as well. If you are

interested in being coached by me, get a hold of me.

Trent@BrightIdeas.co and we’ll make a similar trade.

Sean: Awesome.

Trent: All right.

Sean: Somebody should respond to that, man, because to be able to

work directly with you has a huge value. The person that’s doing

this stuff for me now, I asked her today how it was going, and

she said she’s loving it. She said she never anticipated

enjoying the work, and for her, listening to all the interviews,

and going through all the content has been extremely educational

and fun for her, so she’s just like, “I’m actually loving it.”

Trent: No kidding. That’s kind of another good point. Just the mere

fact that you would have to listen to all the episodes is like

an advanced marketing degree through your ear buds.

Sean: It is, right?

Trent: It’s not like it’s all my great ideas. I’ve had some pretty

darn smart entrepreneurs on this show who are killing it, and

I’m good at getting them to explain step by step exactly what

they’re doing to get that result. Maybe I should take my own

advice and just listen to more of my own episodes.

It’s funny. I actually did re-listen to one of my own episodes.

As people who listen to my show regularly know, we’re launching

this agency for my wife, and I had interviewed a couple people

who are really doing well with their agencies, so I went and re-

listened to my own interviews. I was there the first time

around, but you can’t take as good notes when you’re the host of

the show as you can when you’re just sitting in a chair with

your ear buds.

Sean: Yeah, it’s a different experience listening to it after you’ve

done it, isn’t it?

Trent: Yeah, it is, very much so. Out of my own episode, I did this

one with Graig Presti, I think I got a solid page of notes of

action items that were built into our launch plan, and it was

really good.

Sean: That’s awesome. Yeah, I do the same. I go back and listen to

every episode mainly just because I want the extra download to

my numbers.

Trent: I don’t believe you.

Sean: Yeah, I’m kidding. I find it educational, man. I do. There’s

always stuff when we do the interviews. For example, you’re

interviewing me and there’s probably been a moment or two where

you kind of drift off in La-La Land in your head because you’re

thinking about something I said, so it’s been a lot like

watching a movie twice, or reading a book a second time for me

to go back and listen to it. I’ve heard things that I must have

just unconsciously just blacked out in thought.

Trent: Yeah, that’s true, because a lot of times when you’re talking,

I’m either writing something down, I should video this one day

so people can see what I’m doing, or I’m looking at the next

question, or I’m thinking about where I want to take the

interview. Sometimes I’m going, “Holy crap, what’s the next

question I’m supposed to ask? I don’t have one written down.”

Sean: The other thing is, too, I’ve noticed a lot of things that have

helped me improve my podcast, Trent, and it’s like geez, dude,

just shut up and let your guest talk. It’s just like when I hear

myself, I’m like, “All right. Next time I’m not going to do

that.”

Trent: Yeah. I am guilty of that, absolutely. I think I’m getting

better. Hopefully some people who are listening to this show are

laughing their butts off now because they’re like, “Yeah, Trent,

you’re on drugs. You’re not getting any better.”

Sean: Oh, that’s great.

Trent: With that said, another question coming your way. How are you

doing for time, by the way?

Sean: I’m good.

Trent: I had mentioned at the beginning of this episode I wanted to

cover three broad topics. The first one was how you launched

your podcast and got so much traction. The second one was

talking about the team. Then, I want to talk more about this

publishing business that you run because I’m super interested in

that business. It’s something that I probably could, or maybe

even should, be doing as well.

Take two minutes and just kind of give us the quick overview of

what the business is, and then I’ve got my first couple of

questions kind of tucked away in my mind that I want to ask you,

but I want people to have context for what those questions are.

Sean: Sure. I have an online, or digital, publishing company, and we

take digital trainings and sell them. I don’t do any of the

content myself. There’s a little bit here and there I do, but

I’m not like the face or the name or anything behind it. What I

focus on is just finding other experts who are really good with

a certain topic or niche, but don’t have the audience that we

have, so we then take them, publish them, take their content,

package it up in a sexy package, and then sell it. They bring

the content, we bring everything they need. Our deals are they

have to be available for some promotional-type stuff here and

there. That, provide the content, and provide updates to the

content should things change, and then we handle all the rest.

Trent: It’s digital publishing promotion at its finest.

Sean: Exactly. It’s pretty much the same as a book publishing company

publishing somebody’s content just from a book perspective.

Trent: Only probably more profitable.

Sean: You got it.

Trent: Let’s go back to the very beginning when this business had not

done its first dollar of revenue. I didn’t know you back then,

so correct me if I’m wrong here, but I’m assuming that nobody

knew who you were. What did you do before this? I guess I should

ask that question.

Sean: I had owned a real estate company. I had a brokerage, an

investment firm. That company, I was in charge of all the

marketing, and managed all the agents as well.

Trent: By chance, was your very first product of this digital

publishing company a real estate training product?

Sean: No, but when I sold that business I thought that’s what I would

  1. Just as a little side project, I started blogging about

Twitter. This was in 2008, and I got a website. It’s now defunct

and you won’t find it, but it was MyTwitterExperiment.com.

I just wrote every day for 30 minutes. I’d spend 20 to 30

minutes writing a blog post about things I’d learned that day

with Twitter. I was really into Twitter, so I just though,

“Well, I’ll just write about Twitter, and do this for a couple

of months, and just see what happens. It will be fun, and it

will get my creative juices flowing,” so that’s literally what I

did.

By the end of 30 days, it like really picked up. It was getting

tons of re-tweets on each post. People all of a sudden started

seeing me as an authority. I was getting over 1,000 visits a day

within a month to that website.

Trent: That’s crazy.

Sean: It is crazy, but if you think about it, I was on Twitter

building a huge audience on Twitter, and then writing about

Twitter and how I was building a huge audience on Twitter. It

really was just something that was really easy for them to

share, and at the time, nobody was doing it. Now, everything has

changed, and it’s not as easy as it was back then.

Anyway, that’s what I did and I just took off, so I thought,

“Wow, I should probably create a opt-in so that people can join

a mailing list.” I knew, with real estate, we had a big annual

list of people that were interested in buying or selling

properties. I knew kind of the value in that, so I thought,

“Well, I know there are some different products I can market

that I’ve been touting on the blog and earn affiliate

commissions.” That’s what I started doing, collecting an email

list, was getting an insane amount of opt-ins every day.

By month three, I think I started monetizing it. My first

attempts at monetizing were just sending out offers to products

and services that I used. They could be software, they could be

all different kinds of things, and I was getting, I think, the

first month or two like $1,000 or $2,000, so three months in I

was earning $1,000 to$2,000 a month by sending out a few emails

a month, and then putting a few in the auto-responders.

Then, I wrote a book on Twitter, about 120-page book, started

selling that, and by month three to six, I was probably earning

$3,000 to $4,000 a month in book sales and affiliate promotions,

and it was going up by a hair every month.

Then I met a business partner that I had at the time, Lewis

Howes. I don’t know if you know him, but he was doing the same

thing with LinkedIn. I said, “Dude, my audience can really use

what you’ve got, and your audience can use what I’ve got. We

should partner up and do some stuff,” and we did. That was kind

of the beginning of everything.

Trent: His course was the first product that your publishing company

brought to market?

Sean: Well, we were business partners for a long time and originally

we created some trainings together, and then we did the LinkedIn

training because it was just this simple little training. We

were selling mainly higher-end products like $500 to $1,000, and

sometimes $2,000.

Trent: People were paying $2,000 to get a LinkedIn course?

Sean: No, it was like a six-week live training, and a bunch of other

things, so they were paying that. They were getting consulting,

and some done-for-you-type stuff, and this, and a lot of stuff,

actually, for the money. We had a whole segment of our audience

that couldn’t afford all that, so we said let’s create this $100

LinkedIn training and we started selling that.

As soon as we did that, I realized there was some really good

revenue coming in from that, and I said, “We should publish one

on YouTube.” I had used YouTube a lot with my real estate

business and had tremendous success with it. I was getting,

literally, like five buyer leads a day from YouTube. If you’re a

realtor listening to this, you’re going to probably think I’m

full of shit, but our videos averaged about 5,000 views a video

because we did some pretty smart stuff with SEO for real estate.

It was really easy to get a property video up to the front of

Google at the time. Anyway, so it just crushed it.

I came up with an idea late one night, and I talked to my

business partner about it at the time. He was just like, “Maybe

we should find somebody else to produce it who is really kind of

an active expert in the field. Let them do all the content and

we’ll just focus on selling it.” I’m like, “Yeah, that’s a good

call.” We both knew James Wedmore. We reached out to him. He was

really receptive and open to do it, so that was our next

product.

As soon as we inked that deal, I said, “Well, why don’t we do

Facebook as well if we’re going to do this and that?” We reached

out to Amy Porterfield that same week and got a commitment from

her to do FB Influence. That was how it all really began.

It was just this funny thing where we created this $100 product

and we did a product launch behind it and anticipated the sales

kind of dying down, and they ended up generating $300 to $400 a

day in revenue. I just thought, “Wow, if we had 10 to 20 legs,

different products generating this kind of revenue, that could

be great.” That was kind of the beginning of it.

Trent: I’m going to guess you’re probably familiar with

EarlyToRise.com?

Sean: Did you say Early To Rise?

Trent: Yeah.

Sean: Yeah.

Trent: They’re doing $20 million a year in information products from

what I have heard. Obviously I’ve never seen their books. Would

you say that your model is similar? Exactly the same?

Sean: Yeah, it’s similar. We’re not doing that kind of revenue.

Trent: Where I’m going with this is they obviously…

Sean: Oh, this is Craig Valentine, yeah. Here are two things. This

space is fitness. If they’re doing $20 million in revenue,

they’re probably keeping about a million of that. This is a

ClickBank product. I’m just kind of giving you some insight. I

would rather have my business at one-tenth of the revenue and

probably similar profits.

Their business model, they have to give away the majority of

their profit. Actually, I shouldn’t be saying any of this. Never

mind. I won’t even go there. It’s just a high revenue, low

margin business. Craig’s a genius and he’s got this thing fully

automated, I think, for the most part.

Anyway, nothing bad to say about those guys. I don’t mean it

like that, but it’s just I chose to grow my business in a

different way. For me, I would rather have a smaller business

where I get to keep the majority of it versus… I have a friend

that has a company with 1,500 employees. Literally, he started

nine years ago, and now has 1,500 employees, and the revenue

they do is astronomical, but his salary, I think, is close to $2

million a year, and I think I can get there with 10 employees.

Trent: Yeah, I wouldn’t want 1,500.

Sean: Can you imagine?

Trent: Can I imagine…

Sean: Managing 1,500 people?

Trent: Well, no, because you’d manage five people that would manage

1,500 people, would be my guess.

Sean: Yeah, but, you still have… Anyway, go ahead. Sorry to derail

that.

Trent: You damn hijacker, you. The reason I brought ETR up was because

my understanding from the interview that I listened to with CEO,

they’re driving paid traffic into the funnel and they convert it

profitably. I was using that as a segue to ask how are you

driving traffic to your various legs on this e-publishing

company? For you, it’s not one site. It’s a whole bunch of

different sites for the different products. How many products is

interesting to me, and you can throw that number out if you want

to, but what I’m really interested in is have you managed to use

paid media to evergreen the funnel profitably?

Sean: I don’t know if this was while we were on the air or off the

air, but remember when we talked, I was telling you how I was

just sitting in the water waiting for waves and thinking how I

had a lot of holes in my business? That’s one of them. The paid

traffic. We don’t do any paid traffic. All of our sales, and I’m

just looking right now to see if there’s any truth in what I’m

about to say, we do about, outside of promotional periods and

everything, probably in the ball park of $3,000 to $4,000 a day

in revenue, all from referral, word of mouth, repeat customers,

affiliate traffic, you name it. It just comes from everything,

so paid traffic is a big opportunity for us.

One of the problems we have with doing paid traffic is we’ve

never sold our products as this will make you rich. That’s the

kind of stuff that sells really well, and converts really well,

but we didn’t want to go that route. We’re not trying to make

anybody rich. We’re just trying to educate you. It’s a challenge

to pay for traffic and get it to convert when you’re not making

all these great and grand promises that send people over the

edge to buy.

That’s the deal. We are now getting into that, and we’ve done a

lot of paid stuff in the past, but we never stuck with anything

for one reason or another. That is a big focus for me.

In May, we started implementing… I needed to work on upsells

and a funnel after people purchased, offering them additional

things should they need it. We’ve got that dialed in at about 90

days that the revenues on the front-end sale are up about 80%.

If somebody pays me $100, the average customer is now paying

$180 within two weeks of buying our products.

Trent: That’s good.

Sean: Yeah, so I wanted to work on that prior to spending money, so

that if I now have to spend $150 to earn $100 back on day one, I

know that by day 14, I’ll generate $180 in theory. It could be

more, it could be less, because the traffic’s a little bit

different, but that’s the idea.

Trent: You’re working on it?

Sean: We just now, literally like the last couple weeks, started

running some small samples, but that, to me, is a way that I can

increase our revenues that we’re not currently doing.

Trent: Are you using Infusionsoft on the backend of your business, or

businesses?

Sean: Yeah, Infusionsoft is one of the tools we use. We use that and

then, also, we do a lot of stuff with ClickBank.

Trent: You’re not using the Infusionsoft shopping cart. You use

ClickBank for payment processing and affiliate?

Sean: We do. With the paid stuff, we’re using Infusion, and with a

lot of our in-house stuff we use Infusion, but probably 60% of

our business goes through ClickBank.

Trent: Not that I’m any ClickBank expert at all, but it seems to me

like their business has also gone through a huge change in the

last 12 to 18 months.

Sean: In what fashion?

Trent: A lot less biz-opp, IM products.

Sean: Oh, yeah. They’re kind of moving away from that, which is good

because there are a lot of great products on there, and they

have a certain stigma attached with it. I couldn’t care less

what else is on there. Ninety percent of my customers have no

idea what ClickBank even is.

For me, it just makes my life easy because I don’t have to worry

about tracking sales, paying affiliates, issuing W9s, collecting

W9s, running reports, blah, blah, blah. All I do is just get a

check, and they handle everything for me. I don’t have to worry

about taxes. I don’t have to worry about European VAT taxes. I

don’t have to worry about state taxes. I don’t have to worry

about all these random things that often in Infusion is not

automated or set up for you. If you are successful, you could

have a government agency knocking on your door saying you owe us

a lot of money and you’re going to jail for not paying your

taxes. I love ClickBank for just that alone.

Trent: That’s a good point. We’re going to nerd out here just for a

moment, but Infusionsoft users will be able to appreciate this.

When you’re using Infusionsoft shopping cart and a purchase

happens that’s a goal in a campaign, you can trigger all sorts

of events off the satisfaction of a goal. Can you plug into the

API at ClickBank to be able to accomplish more or less the same

thing? Do you know?

Sean: Yeah, you can. The only thing we literally use Infusionsoft

anymore for is the shopping cart purposes. We have shifted to

our own email software that’s housed on our servers. There’s a

whole long technical story to get into, but essentially our

emails were going into spam. When your emails get over a certain

size, they start getting looked at differently by Gmail, and

Hotmail, and all that stuff. If you’re not getting 50% open

rates, often times a lot of your email will end up in spam.

Again, it’s really technical. I don’t want to get into it, but

we have our own servers now, so we have the APIs from Infusion

and ClickBank tied into our servers so that when a purchase

happens, it goes into an auto-responder within our own email

provider on our servers.

Trent: You said you still are using Infusionsoft’s shopping cart?

Sean: To process stuff, and we’ll probably change that shortly

because it’s way too costly to be using just for a shopping

cart.

Trent: Yeah. I’m confused because ClickBank is the shopping cart, so

are you…

Sean: There are two reasons for that. ClickBank, at the end of the

day, if I’m selling something with myself, on $100 product, I

see about $88 of it, or on a $97 product, I see $88. With

Infusionsoft, on our merchant fees, on a $97 product, I’ll see

about $94. It gets deposited into my bank account two days

later. With ClickBank, I think we have it set up to be deposited

every two weeks. Sometimes if you’re spending $3,000, $5,000 or

$10,000 a day, it’s nice to have that right back so you can plow

it back into it and not have to wait two weeks.

Trent: Absolutely. Again, I’m just trying to understand. You’re using

Infusionsoft shopping cart to sell your own products…

Sean: Yeah, when we’re driving the sales.

Trent: When affiliates are driving the sales, then… Got it. Light

bulb just went off.

Sean: There are certain circumstances where if we have an affiliate

that will do 100, 200, 300 sales, we’ll run that through our

cart and then we pay the affiliate immediately. They love it

because they get paid right away. These are our friends, so it’s

just like hey, we don’t want to run it through here and lose 5%.

All of that ongoing business, or that daily business, the

referral and all that stuff, that’s all run through ClickBank.

Trent: Do you have someone on your team that’s tasked with reaching

out to promotional partners on a regular basis, affiliates, and

saying, “Hey, let’s do a webinar, let’s do a promotion, let’s do

this, that, and the other thing”?

Sean: We don’t. A lot of guys I know do. We just don’t have that. For

me, that’s not our business model. We do some product launches

here and there, but that’s an easy thing for me to communicate.

I just call people I know that will promote it to their friends,

and then send emails out to… I think we have close to 10,000

affiliates, so we’ll just shoot an email out to those affiliates

and say, “Hey, we have this coming up. Here are some details

about it. Get involved if you want.”

Trent: All right, my friend, we have been an hour and 15, and I’ve

got, in nine minutes, another call I’ve got to get on, so I just

ran out of time. Actually, if you include our off-air talk,

we’ve been talking for two hours straight.

Sean: Oh, my gosh, yeah. I’ve got to get to work. I’ve got an

interview this morning for my podcast. I’ve really not done much

today.

Trent: Well, you contributed a whole bunch onto the Bright Ideas

podcast.

Sean: It was an honor to be on again.

Trent: Yeah, dude, it was a lot of fun. I thank you very much for all

the chit-chat. We’ve just got a couple quick things we’ll cover

off-air once I hit the stop button here, so don’t hang up right

away. Thank you very much. If anyone wants to get a hold of you,

what is the best way to do that?

Sean: I’m on Twitter, so that’s @SeanMalarkey. You can go to the blog

if you want to leave a comment there or anything, I see all

that. On Facebook, I’m kind of at my friend max. If you want to

add me there, I’d be happy to have you, and I’ll remove somebody

that I don’t really know or don’t see active. Just shoot me a

message if you would even if it goes to the other box. I’m

getting in the habit of checking that now because a lot of

people have been reaching out, so that’s very cool. Any which

way you want. Just Google me, you’ll find me.

Trent: Well, I sent you a Facebook friend request way at the beginning

of this, so you better add me, man.

Sean: All right, I will. I think I have to remove one person, but

it’s not too difficult.

Trent: That’s going to be a wrap for this episode with Sean. Thank you

so much for being on the show.

Sean: Again, thanks for having me, man. It was a real honor.

Trent: All right, to get the show notes for today’s episode, head over

to BrightIdeas.co/71. Now, if you really enjoyed this episode,

I’ve got to ask you a little favor. Love it if you would go over

to BrightIdeas.co/love. When you do, you will find a pre-

populated tweet. Would love it if you would share that with your

followers. Even more than that, would love it if you would take

a moment to go over to iTunes and give the show a five star

rating. The more five star ratings we get, the better iTunes

ranks us. The better our ranking, the more people get to listen

to the show, and the more Bright Ideas from proven entrepreneurs

just like Sean we get to spread out in the community.

Thank you so much. That’s it for this episode. I am your host,

Trent Dyrsmid, and I look forward to seeing you in the next one.

Take care and have a wonderful day.

About Sean Malarkey

Sean_Malarkey_04

Sean is the president of Inspired Marketing, a web based Internet Marketing Education company that helps clients achieve their goals online through digital trainings on all things Social Marketing & Online Marketing.

Sean is passionate about marketing and helping individuals better understand how to market themselves online using social media.

Sean is also the host of The Money Pillow, a blog and podcast dedicated to making money while you sleep (and play).

Digital Marketing Strategy: How to Drive Traffic to Your Site Using Nuclear Fuel with Mike Stelzner of the Social Media Examiner

Michael Stelzner is the founder of Social Media Examiner, author of the books Launch: How to Quickly Propel Your Business Beyond the Competition and Writing White Papers: How to Capture Readers and Keep Them Engaged, the popular Social Media Marketing Industry Report, and the man behind large summits, such as the Social Media Success Summit.  He is also host of the Social Media Marketing podcast show.

Listen to the Audio

Digital Marketing Strategy: How Graig Presti Grew His Local Marketing Agency to 7 Figures In His First Year

Do you think you could start with nothing and build a 7 figure local marketing agency in your first year? If you follow Graig Presti’s advice, you sure can.

Do you think you could start with nothing and build a 7 figure local marketing agency in your first year? If you follow Graig Presti’s advice, you sure can.

Graig Presti started his local marketing consulting business and did something different than most: he chose to offer his services only to dentists…and by doing so, he grew top line revenue to 7 figures in year one…and has increased it to $3.5 Million in year 3. When you consider that most local marketing consultants really struggle to attract clients, Graig’s accomplishments are nothing short of amazing.

In this interview, you’ll hear Graig and I talk about:

  • (2:17) Introductions
  • (3:47) The results he’s getting (automating all sales)
  • (7:47) Why he picked dentists
  • (12:17) How he generates leads, and his sales funnel
  • (14:47) How he builds a list; using sponsored email, direct mail, LinkedIn, and JV partners
  • (17:47) The lead magnet he uses: Google Review Cheat Sheets
  • (19:27) How leads are nurtured
  • (22:17) How he’s using webinars
  • (30:57) How he converts webinar attendees to customers
  • (32:37) An overview of his product offerings
  • (41:17) The downside of continuity
  • (43:37) Where his customers are located
  • (45:17) How he leverages the telephone
  • (52:17) How to get others to send email sponsoring you
  • (57:17) How he’s using direct mail
  • (58:17) How he uses postcards with personalized landing pages
  • (1:04:17) How he’s running ads on LinkedIn
  • (1:08:17) How long it took him to get his ad spend back
  • (1:11:57) How long it took him to get his first client
  • (1:18:27) The benefits of a Mastermind

Links

Additional Resources

Graig gets great results using simple text like this.

Graig gets great results using simple text like this.

There's nothing complex about this formula.

There’s nothing complex about this formula.

 

More About This Episode

The Bright Ideas podcast is the podcast for business owners and marketers who want to discover how to use online marketing and sales automation tactics to massively grow their business.

It’s designed to help marketing agencies and small business owners discover which online marketing strategies are working most effectively today – all from the mouths of expert entrepreneurs who are already making it big.

Listen Now

Leave some feedback:

Connect with Trent Dyrsmid:

Transcript

Trent: Hey there, bright idea hunters. Welcome to the Bright Ideas podcast.

I’m your host, Trent Dyrsmid, and this is the podcast for marketing

agencies and entrepreneurs who want to discover how to use content

marketing and marketing automation to massively boost their business.On the show with me today is an entrepreneur by the name of Graig Presti.

He’s the founder of localsearchfordentists.com and you are in for a real

treat in this interview because I ask Greg a truckload of questions and I

drilled down for detail on all of them. He’s going to explain to you how he

built his local marketing company that serves dentists.He did a million dollars in his first year. Three years in, he’s doing

almost $4 million a year. His profit margins are off the charts. He’s got

hundreds of customers, and he has automated virtually the entire sales

process. I shouldn’t say “virtually the entire” — he’s automated the

entire sales process and so attracting new clients for him is not a

challenge. When you listen to this interview, you’re going to hear exactly

what he does. There are gold nuggets galore in this interview.Before we get to that, I very quickly want to tell you about the Conversion

Tactics Toolkit at brightideas.co. I do a much better job than the average

website at converting my site visitors into subscribers and then those

subscribers get converted within my marketing funnel into customers. In the

Conversion Tactics Toolkit, which is a four-part video series, I’m going to

open up the kimono. I’m going to show you exactly how I do it all. It’s all

free. All you’ve got to do is go to brightideas.co, enter your e-mail

address, and you’ll get your first video right away.So with all of that said, please join me in welcoming Graig to the show.

Hey, Graig, welcome to the show. Thanks for making the time.Graig Presti: Hey, Trent, thanks for having me on. I appreciate it.

Trent: No problem. So for the folks who don’t know who you are yet, please,

real quickly, who are you and what do you do?

Graig: Well, my name’s Graig Presti and I’m the CEO and founder of a

company called “Local Search For Dentists”. Basically what we do is we help

dental practices all over the world, really, we have clients all the way

from the United Kingdom to here in the United States leverage the Internet

and start to get more patients, more phone calls, and more bottom-line net

profits. The way that we do that is through a lot of Internet tactics and

so on and so forth, but we’ve really had some good success with being able

to do that and I’ve grown the business quite quickly in the last two to

three years.

Trent: Terrific. So, for the folks — I know that I’m like this whenever

I’m listening to a podcast, I always do this and I hope you don’t mind —

let’s talk about the results that you’re getting now and then I want to go

backwards and have you explain to everyone all the strategies and tactics

you’re using to get those results. So can you talk a little bit — if

you’re willing to, of course — about number of customers and maybe top-

line revenue that your firm is generating?

Graig: Sure, and if you hear someone blowing in the background, they’re

doing the landscaping right now at the office, so I apologize for that in

advance. I didn’t know that they would be coming today.

Really, the key way that I built my business so fast was the fact that I

was able to automate all of my marketing and all of my sales to occur all

the time, seamlessly without me, so we were able to therefore have a

minimal staff because everything we were doing was completely automated. We

use InfusionSoft to automate our marketing. I’ve tried a bunch of different

other things but, for me, the InfusionSoft, like I was telling you earlier,

basically I’ve used it since its inception and there really is no other

software out there that you can sync up direct mail, sales funnels, e-mail

marketing, SMS marketing, and then syncing up automated webinars.

There’s really no other system out there that allows you to do that. You’d

have to have 1,000 microworkers doing what you need them to do, so without

out it, we wouldn’t have had half the growth that we’ve had.

Trent: So how big’s the company now?

Graig: In terms of employees or . . .?

Trent: Revenue. Give a range.

Graig: Revenue? Well, we went in our first year, we went from $0 to $1

million in revenue in 12 months and this year we’re going to do over $3.5

million dollars in just under three years.

Trent: That’s not a bad business, my friend.

Graig: No, and it’s a very good business and the reality is we’ve become

very profitable because of what I’ve said, where, we’ve automated

everything. We don’t have huge overhead. We don’t need 50 employees. We

only need a small team and as long as the little engine is running in the

background, we’re good to go.

Trent: So let’s talk a little bit about that. I don’t normally ask this but

you alluded to it: you’re very profitable. Do you mind sharing what the

profit percent is?

Graig: Yeah, I don’t mind. It obviously ranges from product to product but,

in general, our company’s going to run around a 40% profit margin.

Trent: Wow, that is phenomenal. All right, and how many employees —

because I know when I ran my old service business, and I didn’t know

anything about automation back then — I needed about one employee for

every $100,000 of annual revenue. So how many full-time employees do you

have?

Graig: Well, to your question — let me back you up. Your little formula

that you used applies to your business a little bit, but you can really

scale ours a little bit more because we’re Internet-based, so it really

comes down to utilizing a system and then putting clients into that system

so then you don’t get out of that system. So we can basically crank out

more work with less people.

Right now we have, I’d say — I like to break it up between operations,

which is fulfillment, and sales and marketing. So on the operations side,

we have about 12 people. Some of them are outsourcers, some of them are

internal employees doing the fulfillment inside of things.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: Then on the sales and marketing side of things, you have really four

people, including myself, because I do handle the marketing. I don’t write

the copy, but I handle sort of the campaign-building and things like that,

so about four. The reason we only really needed three to four people on the

sales and marketing side is because we’re so systematic with our marketing

that I’ve figured out how much I need to spend to acquire a client, what’s

my most profitable activity, and all I do is I just put leads into that

system. I don’t try to get fancy and that’s really all we’ve done.

Trent: All right, and we’re going to talk about that. Before we get into

that — because I know that a lot of people that are in my tribe that are

going to listen to this interview, they are either looking to start a

business, and I do everything I can to encourage them to start what I call

a “real business”, which is one like yours that has customers, as opposed

to some goofy fly-by-night, get-rich-quick thing that you see all over the

Internet, which I don’t believe in those.

Then the other portion of my tribe is marketing consultants–or the next

biggest portion, I should say, is marketing consultants who, by and large,

are one-person shops and I don’t think too many of them are getting rich

and they’re all looking for ways to get more customers. In one of my

courses called the “Best Buyer Formula”, one of the very first things I

talk about is pick a profitable niche, so do you want to talk a little bit

about why you picked dentists versus all the other niches you could’ve

picked?

Graig: Right, right. It’s a good question. I get asked that at every dinner

party I go to because that just sounds so crazy to people, like, “Why

wouldn’t you just try to conquer the world?”

Trent: Why not just be everything for everyone?

Graig: Why wouldn’t you just do everyone? It’s hard to explain that to

someone who might not think the way that I think and the way that you think

and so on and so forth. It’s a very logical thing why I chose dentists.

Well, I use this in any time I look at going after it for any niche, is

there’s like three to four criteria.

Let’s just take dentists for example. One, their customer transaction size

is high, so their average customer value is going to be anywhere between

$1,000 and $3,000. That allows them to spend more money on consultative

services, i.e., Internet marketing, right? So now a service that costs $500

a month or $2,000 a month, if it gets him patients, is pretty palatable

because they know they only need a few to make money.

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: So it lowers price resistance naturally. Now, on the flipside of

that, if I was to go after, say, the chiropractic niche or plumbers or

roofers, well, the transaction size is a lot less and a lot less frequent,

so they’re not going to be able to essentially afford expensive services,

okay?

Then the second step with dentists is they have a lot of problems with

marketing and a lot of problems with technology, so they essentially need

outsourcers to do the work. They’re not going to do it internally mostly.

They need someone who’s an expert to do it. Then, on the flipside of that

is you need someone who has, essentially, the need for marketing. They’re

not a referral-based business. Dentists have to market externally. They’re

not like an M.D. who gets patients from insurance. I think it’s only like

20% of people get dental insurance. They need to go out and get new

customers and new patients so they need marketing, so it was very, very

specific as to why I chose dentistry — because they have the transaction

size to support the cost, they have the problems and need the marketing to

sustain their business, therefore they need a company like mine.

Trent: Absolutely, couldn’t agree more. Okay, so now let’s roll up our

sleeves here and talk. Let’s start at the very beginning of the funnel

because nothing happens until you have a lead. It’s hard to make a sale if

you don’t have a lead.

Graig: Right on.

Trent: Please talk about InfusionSoft and automation as much as you like

because that’s the big thing that I’m trying to get people to understand,

is you shouldn’t be doing this stuff manually and obviously you’re not, so

please give as much detail as you’d like.

Graig: Sure. Yeah, I mean, just as a disclaimer, anyone who is trying to

half-ass it and not 100% automate their marketing and using something cheap

like iContact or AWeber, you really need to change that mindset because if

you really want to increase your income, you need to just bite the bullet,

go over and do something that automates everything. That’s just a

disclaimer. That’s not a sales pitch, that’s just the truth because I’ve

messed around with all of those things before.

But back to your original question, okay? For me, it’s a very simple Dan

Kennedy-style lead generation: put them through a simple sequence that

makes them more able to purchase and buy, right? Then there’s pre-

qualification steps in between there. We’ll do the typical lead source,

drive them to a landing page or squeeze page offering them a free report or

some sort of free content for an opt-in and then the opt-in takes them to a

low-end product office for $97. Then after they buy the $97 thing, we’re

trying to up-sell them into the big, multiple-of-thousand-dollar thing.

So that’s the lifecycle of our client. Now, not everybody’s going to take

that cycle, but anyone who doesn’t essentially take the $97 low-end offer,

they get put into a drip sequence that’s automated and then they get

marketed to constantly after that, both offline and online.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: Until they buy or die.

Trent: Pretty much just like my funnel.

Graig: So someone listening is probably going like, “That’s it?” Honestly,

I coach other people on how to become local marketers like myself and we

spend a day together and I map out this funnel for them — and obviously I

go into greater detail — they’re just blown away at how simple it is, yet

how effective it is.

All that, by the way, Trent, operates on its own. I don’t sit here pushing

a button 270 times a day. It just happens because of InfusionSoft and that

allows me to do that. Then one of the other cool things that I do is in

between those sequences and so on and so forth, is I can automate webinars

with Stealth Seminar to work with InfusionSoft, so I can literally use live

events to sell my services automatically, which is pretty cool.

Trent: Absolutely. Okay, so let’s go right back to the leads. How are you,

first of all, getting your list? Are you buying a list? Are you having a VA

going around and do Google searches and make a spreadsheet for you? Because

you’ve got to identify your targets and you’ve got to build a finite list.

Graig: Right, right. I have a very specific criteria and pet peeve of mine

that where all I do is I find the lead sources and then I let my marketing

copy drive the opt-ins and drive the leads because I don’t want to deal

with folks who are not really interested in the topic that I’m talking

about, okay? I don’t want to just buy a list of dentists and then just

bombard them with push marketing. I want people who are actually going to

be interested in my services, who that copy speaks to them, right? So

they’re like, “Well, I need to have that.”

The way that I do it is I have, just like a lot of my things is I don’t

like using just one lead source, so I use some sponsored e-mail blasts that

are through other dental companies. I do direct mail, where I’ll use

postcards and so on and so forth to drive them to a landing page. I’ll use

online traffic via LinkedIn and paid ads and I drive all those people to

one single lead source, so I’m getting a myriad.

I also have JV partners and so on and so forth but I’m not one to go out

and just buy a list or have a VA scrape anything or use any software

because I don’t want crap leads, right? I want people who are actually

raising their hand like, “Oh, you know what? I have that problem, I need to

get that free report.”

Trent: Now, are you using tracking links, Google Analytics tracking links

so that when you look at the traffic that’s going to this one squeeze —

because, I mean, you said you’re using one squeeze page regardless of where

you’re getting the lead from.

Graig: Well, when I say “one squeeze page,” I mean one templated copy

squeeze page. I have that copy myriad of times over tracking each lead

source, so what I’m doing is I’m not only tracking the lead source using

Infusion — which you know you can do, you can set it that way — and then

each lead source has their individual landing page. It looks the same but

it’s a different tracking mechanism, so I don’t really use Google for that;

I use InfusionSoft for that because they have their own dynamic page, so I

know for certain what’s going on there.

Trent: Okay, so these folks are coming from these variety of ways —

sponsored mail, direct mail, LinkedIn and so forth — they’re coming to the

squeeze page. What’s the offer on the squeeze page? And these are

prospective dental clients for you, I just want to be clear. I want to make

sure people know we’re not talking about your dentists and getting them

patients; we’re talking about how you’re getting clients.

Graig: Correct, correct, but the thing is that I need to focus on that. In

order for me to offer solutions to their problems, I need to understand

that they need phone calls, they need patients in order for my services to

speak to that problem, right? So, for me, one of my biggest lead source

magnets, if you will — because I’ve done a few, more than one — but my

best one has been my Google Review cheat sheets, which essentially is a

templated way for dental practices to get more Google patient reviews, five-

star Google patient reviews.

Essentially that’s what I’m giving them that template for free so they can

go out and start to get good patient reviews instantly on Google, and that

seems to be quite the little hot button for folks right now. Then that gets

them going into my sequence.

Trent: Okay. I’m just jotting notes here. Sorry, audience, I wish I could

write faster but I’ve got to have good show notes for you guys. Okay, so

that’s your number one lead magnet? Do you use anything else for a lead

magnet or is that pretty much . . .?

Graig: I have three to four free reports and so on and so forth. I have a

couple videos, stuff where I just put content out and then I have my

copywriter write it up and I’ll use that just to sort of shake it up. But

my bread and butter is what I just told you.

Trent: Okay. Let’s talk about the sequence that happens because when you

use InfusionSoft, they fill out this form and you’re applying some tags,

which is just a means of categorizing people and causing things to happen.

Walk us through the sequence so that we understand what is happening to

those leads, so we understand how they’re being nurtured.

Graig: Okay, so after someone opts-in, right, they give their name and e-

mail to get, we’ll say, the Google Review thing, okay, they are then sent a

follow-up e-mail automatically, providing the content that I said I would

give them. That’s important for people to understand that. You can’t just

give away crap. You do have to provide them with some really good stuff in

that follow-up e-mail because that, essentially, is your first introduction

to them, right? They need to trust you at that point and not think you’re

full of it.

So while that’s being sent, they’re also being flipped to an up-sell page

which sells them a $97 product.

Trent: Which is what?

Graig: Which is what?

Trent: Yeah, what is that?

Graig: It’s basically the ability to essentially look at what they’re doing

right now with their marketing and kind of give them a diagnostic on where

they’re failing and where they’re not failing.

Trent: Is this a loss leader for you? I mean, do you actually have some

manual delivery in fulfilling what they’re buying for $97?

Graig: Yeah, it is a manual thing but that’s on purpose.

Trent: Okay, and is it a VA that’s doing it or are you interacting with

them?

Graig: Nope, that’s actually my sales consultants will fulfill on that.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: Because it’s part of the sales mechanism, so it’s important that

they communicate the results to them in a proper way.

Trent: So what do you call that product or that report?

Graig: We call that like a “Dental Marketing Game Plan” is what we’ll call

it.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: And it’s okay that’s manual, by the way, because 50% of the people

that buy that $97 product buy the big one.

Trent: Yeah, which we’ll get to.

Graig: Sure.

Trent: Okay, so nurture sequence: deliver the content, deliver the up-sell

of $97 — or rather offer the up-sell — and what percentage of the people

who come at the top of the funnel buy the $97 product?

Graig: Well, it really depends on the lead source, right? Because sometimes

the house list is going to convert better than a cold list, so about 25% of

the people take the up-sell. But even though they don’t take the up-sell

doesn’t mean we just stop and give up, right? Because the majority aren’t

going to buy anything, right?

Trent: Right.

Graig: So then they go into, really, just a four-step sequence of

delivering over five days more content — give them an invite to a webinar

in there, give them a video that they can watch, all sort of breeding

content, breeding trust with me, right?

Trent: And is it you on the video and your voice on the webinar?

Graig: Oh, yeah.

Trent: Because you’re trying to get them familiar with you.

Graig: Oh, yeah. Oh, yeah, it’s me. It’s me all the way around, yeah. It’s

more so they can identify with me because here’s the thing: in this day and

age, man, e-mail marketing is just going to get tougher and tougher and

it’s really getting hard now. So without being recognized in the inbox and

being recognized as the go-to person and the authority, man, it’s hard to

sell.

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: It’s hard to sell.

Trent: It’s why I do podcasts and probably the same reason you do them.

Graig: Right, right, right, and so what we do, one of the other things too

is once people are on my list, right — so those are people that opt-in,

they’re on my list, right? So I’ve dripped content to them, they know me,

they hopefully trust me — not everybody’s going to trust me, some people

are just going to ignore it but that’s okay; you actually want that in some

folks — is every month we’re doing a promotional webinar driven to promote

sales. All we’re doing is re-inventing the copy around very similar topics

so that they seem new and then we go out and we sell more stuff every

month, doing it that way, so we’re actually holding virtual events one time

a month.

Trent: And are those one-time-per-month virtual events actually live or are

they recorded?

Graig: Of course not. Sometimes they are, sometimes they’re not. I would

say most of the time, most of the time they are evergreened most of the

time.

Trent: Yeah, and some people are like, “Oh, you’re fooling people.” But

you’re not because I think most people know, but it doesn’t matter. I read

a study and it was like 86% of people that attended webinars actually

preferred the recording because that way they can watch it on their on

time.

Graig: You want to know the real answer to that question?

Trent: Sure. Yeah, please.

Graig: The real answer to that question is that most people surveyed in

this country actually think infomercials are live television.

Trent: No way.

Graig: Oh, yeah. Oh, yeah. That’s a hard, proven thing, stat. I’m not

making that up and the reality of that situation is that you should never

feel bad for automating and evergreening everything because some people are

just always going to believe it’s live even if you tell them it’s recorded.

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: So there’s a reason infomercials convert like crazy is because of

that.

Trent: Is that a dog?

Graig: It is my dogs.

Trent: No worries. I like live action on my podcasts. Okay, so, again, I

want to make sure that everyone understands this: they opt-in, they get the

content, they’re all going to see the $97 up-sell, if they don’t buy the up-

sell, they’re going to go into a five-day nurturing sequence of more

content, and then they’re going to get dripped on and then probably going

to see an offer once a month to attend your live event, correct?

Graig: That is correct. They will get sort of driven to opt-in for a live

event once a month, yeah.

Trent: Okay, and the content on the webinar, can you talk about that?

Graig: I can’t. Now, I’m going to disclaimer this: I don’t just have one

webinar. I don’t just sell one thing, right? The webinar content’s going to

depend on what I’m promoting that month and maybe it’s a launch, maybe it’s

not a launch. It just depends on what I feel is going to work that month

from a CEO perspective I want to know what do I think is going to make us

the most amount of revenue this month, so sometimes it’s a long-term

strategy, sometimes it’s just what we do every month.

So what was your question again? I’m sorry.

Trent: Just the content of the webinar, so I’m assuming . . .

Graig: Oh, yeah. The content of the webinar — and this may fly in the face

of what a lot of people say, but it works — yes, I focus on content of the

situation, so whether it’s dental marketing or some sort of dental

marketing, Internet dental marketing, whatever it is, yes, I focus on

content, but I’ve shifted the paradigm where the old way of doing it used

to be, “Oh, just give them amazing, amazing stuff that they can do for like

80% of the webinar and then 20% can be the pitch.”

I did that for a while and it did do well, but then I decided, since

everybody’s doing it, why don’t I just do the opposite of that? I’m just

going to try to sell from the get-go. Sure, I talked about content and what

you should be doing and I did put them through sort of a problem and

agitation and then solving that problem, but I just flat-out made it a

video sales letter, which I don’t know if your audience will know what a

video sales letter is. Do you want me to explain what that is?

Trent: Yeah, go ahead, please.

Graig: Okay, a video sales letter — and I’m sure everyone has probably

seen one before, they just maybe don’t know what that name is — a video

sales letter is basically a PowerPoint slideshow on video of just written

word and someone speaking to that written word in black-and-white. It’s not

a fancy Keynote presentation, it’s not a fancy PowerPoint presentation with

these crazy images. It’s just spoken word to written word is what it is and

they’re just essentially reading it.

The idea behind that is to keep the person engaged and they actually read

along with you as you’re speaking so they’re soaking up that information

more. I decided just apply that to all my webinars and everything’s going

to be a video sales letter now. Even if it’s a webinar, I’m just going to

make it that type of style and, man, I tell you, my conversions went up 20%

by just doing that and that’s how I launch everything now. Everything.

So my webinars really are a video a sales letter. I kind of scrapped the

content and I know that sounds crazy, but . . .

Trent: Just so that me and everyone else understands this, everyone of your

webinars is black text on a white background and your voice is reading

exactly what’s on the screen.

Graig: You got it.

Trent: I love it. All right.

Graig: All my friends, by the way, all my buddies who are entrepreneurs and

Internet marketers and all this stuff, they think I’m crazy.

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: They’re like, “You’re the only one I know that does all that crazy

stuff and that’s how you launch everything?” I’m like, “That’s why it

works.”

Trent: Yeah, sometimes simple is best, man.

Graig: Because think about it this way: if you’re in consulting — so like

you said a lot of your people are consultants and maybe coaches and

marketers and so on and so forth — everybody does a free demo, a free

webinar, a free evaluation. Everyone does that in some fashion or form. I

mean, I even see e-mails these days — that’s how I know it’s getting bad

out there for people — is they’re bribing people to get on their webinars

and do taped demos, like giving them Starbucks gift cards and $25 Visa

check cards. I’m like, that tells me that they don’t know what to do, other

than bribe their prospects to absorb their crap content.

So doing it my way, that’s why it works so well, because everyone’s doing

these demos and webinars and real soft stuff.

Trent: It’s a way of definitely separating the folks that are seriously

interested and likely to take action from the folks that are kicking tires.

Graig: Sure, sure.

Trent: Okay, so I’m at the point now in your funnel where I’ve seen one of

your webinars. What’s an offer look like? What’s the call to action on the

webinar?

Graig: Well, the call to action is buy because here’s this great package

with these great bonuses that I’m offering to the first 10 people, and if

you’re not one of the 10, then that’s okay but you’re just going to miss

out on this great opportunity, so go hit the button below this video, go to

the order page and we’ll talk to you.

Trent: So give me an example of something that you’ve sold via this method

recently, like was it a $1,000, was it a $5,000 deal?

Graig: Well, I’ve always done more expensive products. In my world, I would

deem them expensive, medium to expensive. I’ve never been the cheap person.

I’ve never been the low-end $100 guy, but just recently we did come up with

a low-end offer, which was a press release product where we offered a very

inexpensive, it was $200 to set it up and it’s a $97 a month subscription

and we’re offering some press release marketing for that and that’s the

least expensive thing I’ve ever offered.

But it did quite well. We sold 30 in a night.

Trent: Well, that’s good. That’s three grand a month in continuity for you

right there from one webinar.

Graig: By the way, the goal of having that lower-end sort of nugget is not

to really make any money off of it. It’s okay, the money part of it is

okay, it absorbs some of the cost, but I really want to get those folks

into my other programs, so now I have someone who’s actually paying us, we

can prove results, and now we can really show them how we can even really

ramp it up for them.

Trent: Let’s talk about your products for a minute. Let’s get out of the

marketing funnel for a second. Don’t worry, audience, we’ll come back to

this. But I want to talk about what are you offering to do for people?

Graig: We have “the big three” is what I call them, so we have our big

three products. Now, we don’t do any sort of a la carte stuff. We don’t do,

“Oh, you can pick a Twitter account and we’ll create a Twitter account,”

“Oh, pick a Google account and we’ll create a Google account.” We don’t

really operate like that. It’s really just a one-thing-or-not. You can’t

pick-and-choose what you want type of deal.

Our first product is really our local SEO product, which is basically

helping dental practices get ranked in the cities that they serve via

Google, via Bing, via Yahoo!, utilizing a bunch of things within that.

Trent: And what do you charge for that?

Graig: That one is $2,500 to set it up and $500 a month continuity after 30

days and it is a 12-month contract.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: The second one that we have is Google AdWords management. If people

don’t know what Google AdWords is, it’s basically managing, creating, and

monitoring dental marketing ads for our clients on Google and their various

ad networks, so that way they can get more phone calls, more traffic, and

that’s $699 a month and that includes your budget on Google and your

administration fees. There’s no hidden costs or anything. It’s $699 a month

and that’s a four-month agreement.

Trent: Now I want to clarify something. Does that include the cost of the

ads or that’s just . . .?

Graig: Oh, yeah, that’s everything.

Trent: So they spend $700 a month and you’re going to spend some portion of

that $700 on the actual ads and the rest is kind of your profit margin.

Graig: Correct, and the reason that I structure it that was is because it’s

advantageous for us as the company to run their campaign at 100% premium

efficiency because we don’t want to waste any of the ad budget because we

want to keep them at the top and we want to make money, so they look at us

like the good guy, not the bad guy.

Now, the way most companies price their pay-per-click campaign is they’ll

say, “Okay, well, it’s $1,000 budget minimum and we take 30% of that.” So

if you want to do $2,000, they take 30%. Whatever it is, they take 30%.

Problem is the customer always looks at you like the bad guy, so now

they’ve got to pay Google one thing and then they’ve got to pay your pain-

in-the-butt another thing and if it doesn’t work, they get mad at you no

matter — they don’t get mad at Google, they get mad at you.

So I looked at it as let’s just get a bunch of ads going and we’re just

going to crank down on this, make sure we know our keywords, and that way

our client’s going to get the most out of their campaigns. Because some

months and some days we don’t get any money on our PPC, but that’s okay

because we know our clients are doing better and we know we’ll make that up

at some point.

Trent: So out of $700, how much is left for you, typically, for profit?

Graig: It depends on the city and the area and the client, but that product

really does quite well. That’ll run at a 40% margin.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: Sometimes more.

Trent: And how about the next product?

Graig: Then the next one is our reputation management product that I don’t

actually call it “reputation management” — most people would know

“reputation management” on this podcast — I call it “revenue protection

program” because reputation management implies that you have a reputation

problem and, at that point, now you’re being reactive. I like people to

protect their revenue sources

That means even if you don’t have a reputation problem — say you have no

bad reviews. Let’s just say you’re squeaky clean. Well, the problem is that

you’re not putting your best foot forward because 9 out of 10 patients are

Googling you before they call your practice. So if you’re disorganized and

have nothing done professionally and no review sites on page one and your

Google reviews are slim to none, they’re not going to trust you.

But if you have press releases from FOX News, CNN, third-party media sites,

video on YouTube of your best patients talking about how you’re the best

dentist they ever went to, you’re going to close more cases and you’re

going to have more revenue in your practice. In the event, somewhere down

the line when you get a bad review — not if, but when you get a bad

review, which is bound to happen — you’re protected because you just spent

this amount of time letting us market your practice so that way you’re

almost indestructible on the web.

So if they go to Ripoff Report or Pissed Consumer, you don’t really have to

worry about it because, number one, we’re on it, but on the second part,

you’re protected because you have all this great PR as opposed to none.

Trent: So I want to ask a question about this then. Essentially what this

boils down to is you’re building up so much positive PR that when someone

leaves a negative review, it’s not going to rise to the top because, as a

percentage of the overall reviews, their negative review is negligible. Is

that correct?

Graig: Right, that’s correct and they may never see it.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: For example, I did have a dentist in Louisville who had a patient go

onto — and he was a client of my other services, actually — but he had a

patient go onto Pissed Consumer and say that Dr. Larry gave him a metal

mouth. Talk about a bad review, right? “Gave me a metal mouth.” Well, every

time you Googled his name or his practice, it was like the third spot on

Google in big, bold letters saying this poor dentist gave this guy a metal

mouth.

He was like, “I’ll hear about this all the time! Patients are saying, ‘Do

you know this guy said this? Do you know this?'” He didn’t know what to do,

so we essentially plugged him into our revenue protection program and that

Pissed Consumer site is on like page 15 of Google, never to be seen again.

Trent: So you just produce so much good stuff that ended up being newer

and, because of press releases and so forth, ranked better than the bad

stuff and literally just it pushed down, made it go away.

Graig: Yeah. Yeah, we nuked it. Yeah, it got nuked.

Trent: What are your customers paying you for this service?

Graig: That one is $1,000 to set up everything and $497 a month not only to

maintain the rankings of that content — which, by the way, you can’t just

do it one time and think it’s going to stay up forever. You do have to do

some Internet stuff to do it and make it stick. So we do that for the

months after that and then we monitor the reputation and so on and so forth

after that for $497 a month.

Trent: And what are you doing to monitor it? Are you just using Google

Alerts or is there a special tool that you use?

Graig: We have some proprietary software we use. I mean, obviously, we do

have Google Alerts because they’re quick and nice, but we do have some

reporting tools that we use.

Trent: Okay. So is there anything else in your product portfolio or is that

it?

Graig: That’s pretty much it. I have one program that is basically specific

to implant dentistry. Are you familiar with dental implants? Do you know

what they are?

Trent: Help me out.

Graig: Okay, basically dental implants are a way for people with dentures

and missing teeth to get permanent teeth.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: So this is going to sound awful, but what they do is they drill a

metal post into your jaw and then they put a crown on it and you basically

have stronger than real teeth, so you can go out and eat a steak and smile

and you’re going to have these until you die. Here’s the good news: you’re

going to be happier and your wife’s going to love your new smile, but

they’re $1,000 to $1,500 per tooth.

Trent: Per tooth, yeah. Isn’t this what people call . . .?

Graig: The benefit to that is that every new patient to a dental implant

dentist is worth more, so I decided to come up with an Internet marketing

program that gets more implant patients coming to practices.

Trent: Okay. What do you call that?

Graig: I just call that “Local Search Dental Implant Marketing Program”.

Trent: Okay, and what do you charge for that?

Graig: That one is, we’re charging, I believe, $3,000 to set it up and $697

a month.

Trent: Okay. What percentage of your top-line revenue is recurring?

Graig: What percentage of my top-line revenue is recurring?

Trent: Yeah, because every product you’ve described to me has some kind of

monthly fee, which is what we want.

Graig: Yeah, no, you may have duped me. I have to pull up Infusion — I

actually don’t know that number. You want to know why I don’t know that

number — and this is actually a very good lesson for everyone listening —

because I was part of a business that declined because of its gluttony with

continuity. Continuity is phenomenal. I don’t sell anything without it. I

never will ever.

It’s the best thing in the world, don’t get me wrong, but here’s the

problem: continuity in subscription fees can make you gluttonous. They can

make you forget about the fact that you still need to retain and sell

stuff. So what happens is once a business sort of starts to lean and only

lean on its subscription income, it will die.

Trent: Because you get lazy and stop looking for new customers.

Graig: Correct. For example, this is actually a good lesson for your folks

because just recently we had a bit of a bad stretch. We had some retention

issues with our clients, not because of performance on our part. I think it

just happened to be we weren’t doing the right things to maintain some

customers. We plugged some holes, but here’s what started happening was we

started not retaining and adding new customers and all we did was live off

our continuity.

Well, you have a few customers leaving every single month, before you know

it, you just lost 20% of your revenue, so I don’t know that number but the

reason I don’t is because I know that I have the continuity. I focus only

on new sales and retention and the rest will take care of itself.

Trent: Because if you’re not growing, you’re dying.

Graig: Right, so if I know we need to hit 10 new customers a month and we

hit that above, I know that we’re where we need to be. If we do three to

four, I know we’re screwed because we’re basically going to be living off

of continuity and that just drives me nuts.

The last business I was a part of, that’s how the business died. I had a

company that was doing $15 million a year that went down to barely doing a

million because it lived off its continuity.

Trent: Wow. How many of your customers live or work within driving distance

of you?

Graig: Four.

Trent: Out of how many.

Graig: Out of 400.

Trent: That’s what I wanted you to say. I want people to understand that

this is a business that doesn’t matter what town you live in.

Graig: No. No, no. That’s a minimalistic type of attitude because even the

people that I coach and consult on how to be local marketers have been

conditioned and predetermined to think that they can only sell local

businesses in their particular city and geography and the reality is that

is going to be your death.

Trent: So your sales process begins with online marketing, you make

extensive use of automated webinars, and the sales are, I’m going to guess,

either closed by someone clicking the “buy” button or are they ever closed

by one of your sales reps being on the phone and making the final sale?

Graig: Yeah, yeah. Oh, yeah.

Trent: But they’re not doing it in-person, they’re not getting in their car

and going . . .

Graig: No, no dog-and-pony shows.

Trent: They’re just calling, they’re following-up with someone who is a

lead that has opted-in to your system, correct?

Graig: Correct.

Trent: So there ain’t no cold-calling happening in your shop.

Graig: Oh, no. We have never — and I’m proud to say this — ever, ever

cold-called anyone.

Trent: But yet the phone, very, very powerful tool.

Graig: Yeah. I mean, honestly, I think people who don’t master the art of

selling on the phone and using language and scripting that works is really

doing themselves a disservice because the old-school way of doing it is

somewhat how like the pharmaceutical sales rep does it, and I’m not saying

selling pharmaceuticals is comparative to what we’re doing but think about

it: they have a territory, that’s their territory, they go and they get in

their car and they drive to their offices and they do a dog-and-pony show

and they’re giving away stuff and they’re doing this and they’re doing

that.

Phone sales is a great leverage, a leveraging point to very good marketing.

It should not be the other way around. Your sales should not be your

marketing because companies that are sales-driven and have a little bit of

marketing, they’re always going to be limited and may never be around

forever, but a company that is focused on marketing that has a sales team,

you always do well. Always, always.

Trent: It’s so much easier to hire people, it’s so much easier to train

people, it’s so much easier to retain people when they don’t have to make

cold calls.

Graig: It is. You know what’s funny? I have to tell this story real quick

because this is one, this is a funny story. My aunt is in sales, right? And

she just started doing this job where she works for a very prominent and

well-respected reputation management company in the auto dealer space.

They’re a very large, big, dumb company and they’ve got a lot of money to

burn, clearly.

So I was at her house the other day — we actually took her kids out to go

to Lasertron or whatever, laser tag — and she needed to work from the

house and she needed quiet so she could cold call. I asked her after we

came back, I’m like, “So tell me about how you’re selling these things.”

Which is basically it’s a reputation management sort of portal product for

auto dealers, not a very complicated sale. She’s like, “Well, I have to

make 40 to 50 dials a day.”

Trent: Ugh.

Graig: I’m like, “So where are you getting your leads from?” I’m like, “Are

they giving you opt-ins and you’re calling opt-ins? Where are they coming

from?” She’s like, “We just have directory sites that we just dial.” I’m

like, “So you’re cold-calling?” She’s like, “Yeah.” I’m like, “Ugh, what?”

She goes, “What I don’t understand is, I’m having trouble getting to four

sales a month for a $300 product for an auto dealer.”

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: She tells me — this is the kicker, Trent — she tells me that, in

the Chicago area, they just hired three more sales reps to do what she’s

doing, just dial. I’m like, “Okay, here’s a very philosophical difference

between businesses. There’s a difference between a sales-driven culture and

a marketing-driven culture. Very distinct things, very distinct things.”

A sales-driven culture like that company, they’re using their sales force

like lead gen. They’re saying, “We’re paying this person $15 an hour. We

want them to dial so they can get working leads and that’s just how it is.”

That’s the sales-driven culture. “And hopefully we get lucky and they pop a

sale.”

As opposed to a marketing-driven culture like what we have in my business,

where we wouldn’t even pick up the phone unless the prospect raised their

hands because what they want is what we are giving away, so therefore,

we’re not wasting man-hours, marketing material, energy, money on people

and things. They’re wasting it.

Trent: Plus, no one likes making those calls and nobody likes getting those

calls.

Graig: No. No, and you want to know the funny part about you saying that is

she told me, “I called on a guy who I got him on the phone, I actually got

through the gatekeeper and I got him on the phone” — because, remember,

these are big businesses, they’ve got a gatekeeper, meaning they’ve got

multiple receptionists — so she got the guy on the phone and she says, “I

want to get you on one of our webinars,” and he goes, “Ugh, seriously?

Another webinar? I’ve had five phone calls today of people asking me to get

on webinars, demos, more demos.”

I’m like, “Well, you’d better hope you’ve got a hearty appetite because

you’re going to get 100 more of those every, single time you call because

that’s exactly what’s going to happen.” You just look at that compared to

what we talked about today where people are only getting on my webinars

when they either pay my company, like fork over $100 or $300 or whatever,

or they’ve raised their hand and said, “Hey, I love what you’re saying. I

would like to learn more.” No problem, but you have to get on this webinar

first. They’re going to sign up for the webinar and not complain.

Trent: Can you give the URL of one of your landing pages? I’d love to look

at it.

Graig: Let me check and give you a good one here. Let me pull one up. Ask

me another question and I’ll pull one up.

Trent: All right. Well, now I’ve got to think of another question to ask.

Oh, yeah, while you’re pulling up, let’s talk about your podcast because I

know that you’ve got one.

Graig: Yeah.

Trent: How’s that working out for you?

Graig: It’s good, it’s good. Okay, here, I found one for you.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: Go to localsearchfordentists.com/googlereviews.

Trent: All one word, no hyphens or anything like that?

Graig: Yeah, all one word.

Trent: Okay. Folks, if you’re listening to this . . .

Graig: There’s going to be audio on that, by the way, if you want to shut

that off.

Trent: Yeah. For the folks that are listening to this while you’re driving,

don’t worry, I’ll put this in the show notes, this link, so you’ll be able

to get to it and at the end of this episodes I’ll give you the link to the

Bright Ideas, where on the blog you’ve got to go to get to this interview,

so fear not. Don’t be trying to take notes while you’re driving.

Graig: Yeah, that landing page I just gave you is really good for cold

traffic, meaning a lot of paid media and such. It’s pretty good.

Trent: Now, is this any particular plug-in that you used to make this

landing page or is this just somebody did HTML?

Graig: No, we made that one, we made that one. We made that one in-house.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: But I know this is a template of something. One of my buddies told

me, “Oh, yeah, that’s a whatever page,” and I went, “Well, I saw it, I

liked it, we just made it.”

Trent: Yeah. What’s the conversion rate on this page?

Graig: This one has a 50% opt-in on cold traffic.

Trent: Very nice. Okay.

Graig: I only use this one on — and when I say cold traffic, meaning not a

house list. I only use this one on paid media.

Trent: Okay, so you’re spending money on, say, LinkedIn ads, for example,

and you’re driving them to this page.

Graig: Sure, sure, sure. Yeah, that’s right.

Trent: All right, I want to go back, actually, to the top of the funnel

because I don’t know that I got enough detail. So, sponsored e-mail — we

didn’t dive into that all, so if it’s okay, I’d like to go back and just

talk a little bit more about that particular one and some of the others. So

if someone wants to market to dentists — like you’re doing — how do they

go about finding — first of all, explain what sponsored e-mail is. I’m

sure everyone gets it, but in case a few people don’t, explain what it is

and then explain how you find people to buy it from.

Graig: Right. Okay, so I’m going to be a little private on this answer,

okay, for an obvious reason because lead sources are like gold. That’s my

money, so I will tell you how to find them, essentially, but I will not

tell you where and who, okay?

Trent: Sure, all right.

Graig: So how about that?

Trent: That’s fine.

Graig: Sponsored e-mail blasts — and this is something no one does in any

sort of business, and not necessarily dentistry, and this is what I teach a

lot of the people that I coach on how to be local marketers is there are

people out there who have herds or subscription or magazine companies or

whatever it is, educational companies, that have e-mail lists of people

that open their crap and read it. They have maybe never thought that they

can monetize the e-mails that they send out.

Essentially what a sponsored e-mail blast is, let’s take eye doctors, for

example. Say you want to target LASIK surgeons with marketing consulting or

something like that. Let’s just take them for example. You can go and find

publications, whether it’s continuing education, Eye Doctor Magazine, any

sort of print, maybe there’s blogs, forums, where these guys and gals hang

out and get their information from. You can use this cool little thing

called Google to figure it out, where those things.

Some may have media kits where they do offer sponsored email blasts, you

just didn’t know about it. It’s, say, $1,000. Now, in exchange for that

$1,000, they will send pre-approved e-mail content out to their list from

you with basically an offer: “Here’s my free report, here’s my Google cheat

sheet.” Then you get to keep the leads, you pay them the $1,000. Done deal.

Now, here’s a cool way to do it, is sometimes these media companies never,

ever think to monetize their e-mail list like that. They sell print space,

they sell banner ads, but they never think that by clicking a button they

can make $1,000. And you’ll keep coming back for more if it works, so what

I tell my people is find a community of people in the niche that you want

to go after, find the key-holder to the e-mail list. If they don’t offer a

media kit or something like that, tell them you’ll pay them $1,000 to send

one e-mail out and if it goes well, you’ll give them $1,500 an e-mail and

buy four more of them. That is a way to get someone to mail for you

essentially, sponsor you in a way and I’ve done it a myriad of times

myself.

Sometimes they’ll say no. Sometimes they’ll say, “Oh, we don’t want to do

that.” Sometimes they’re just not into it but, honestly, I know some of the

biggest names in the business in certain niches who, from a publication

standpoint, from a media standpoint, love the e-mail sponsored blasts and

they’re open to doing it.

Trent: Okay, and where does that rank in-between, let’s say, direct mail —

which we’ll talk about next — LinkedIn — which we’ll talk a little bit

after that — and sponsored e-mail? Are they roughly equal? Is sponsored e-

mail the best one?

Graig: Sponsored e-mail is the fastest way to cash.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: That’s the fastest way to build your list. It’s the fastest way to

make money but the problem is it saturates quickly, so it comes down to

really knowing your numbers when it comes to that. In the beginning, you’re

going to be like, “Oh, this is amazing! I got 100 leads from one e-mail.”

Well, in three months, six months, that might be 30 people, that might be

  1. Who knows? So you need to have back-up. So that leads my lead source is

the e-mail blast but I also do a lot of direct mail. I do a lot of cheap

postcards and then I’d say just after that LinkedIn and other paid traffic,

not just LinkedIn but other outside traffic.

Trent: Yeah. Let’s talk about direct mail.

Graig: Sure.

Trent: So are you doing only postcards or do you do three-dimensional?

Graig: No. For lead gen, yes, and the only reason I have is because I’ve

been able to make money doing it, so I just know if I send these postcards

out, I’m going to get traffic, I’m going to get opt-ins and then we’re just

going to push them through. So right now, I do do other direct mail but

mostly I’m using postcards to drive traffic.

The other thing that I’m doing that nobody does is I use postcards to drive

webinar sign-ups.

Trent: So the postcards are either sending to a landing page like the one

you shared with me, this Google Reviews one, yeah?

Graig: Yeah.

Trent: Or a webinar opt-in page.

Graig: Correct. I also use what’s called a PURL postcard. Do you know what

a PURL postcard is?

Trent: No, I don’t, I don’t.

Graig: You don’t? Okay.

Trent: No.

Graig: They’ve been around for a while and they’re pretty cool. So PURL

stands for “personalized URL”.

Trent: Oh, okay.

Graig: So what that basically does is you print a postcard and it’ll say,

“Hey, Trent, look at this cool new thing on how to get 10 to 15 more

clients a month without lifting a finger. I made this brand-new website

just for you. Check it out: abc.com/trent.”

You’re like, “Wow, this person like made their own individual website for

  1. Cool.” So you go to the computer and you type in “abc.com/trent.” You

go the landing page, and it says at the top, “Hey, Trent, thanks for coming

to this webpage” and then inside the web form is pre-populated with your

name and e-mail already and you’re like, “Wow, this is super-customized.”

Conversions go up exponentially because of it because people actually think

you made a real, live individual website for them — but you didn’t. All

you did is all it is is a list uploaded to your server that talks to some

code and the code, when they type in their name, pops it into the fields

and you’re done, so it’s really one webpage with a list. That’s all it is.

Trent: Now, is there a service that you subscribe to get these PURL

postcards?

Graig: No, but there are and they all suck. So I’ve tried to do that before

where I thought I could crank them out quicker, and they’ve all been very,

very terrible, so what I decided to do is I just have a mailing company

that prints the postcards and then the developer uploads the list and then

I just go.

But here’s the good news: once the list is uploaded to your server, you can

just keep adding to it. It’s not like it has to be replaced. So once that

mailing list is uploaded, you could have 100,000 names on there and still

only mail to a 1,000 and it’ll still work.

Trent: So the URL on the postcard is abc.com/trent and it doesn’t matter if

you had 47 Trents on your list because they all come to the page that says,

“Hey, Trent,” because . . .

Graig: We usually do first name, last name.

Trent: Oh, you do? Okay, so everyone’s getting an individual page, so

you’ve got one landing page, your developer wrote a little bit of script,

queries the database, pulls the first name and populates it.

Graig: Yup.

Trent: And makes the URL the same thing.

Graig: Yup, and I would imagine if anyone listening is an InfusionSoft

user, if you go under the Community page, there will be people on there

that can build PURL pages for you.

Trent: Absolutely. What are you spending per-piece for one of these

postcards?

Graig: Oh, geez, I think it’s — what is postage? $0.45 right now or

something like that?

Trent: I have no idea, something like that.

Graig: I think postcards probably run me around $0.65 in total, so the

postage is more than the stuff on the card.

Trent: So it’s about a buck by the time you’re all done.

Graig: No, it’s less than a dollar. No, it’s $0.65 cents.

Trent: Oh, including the postage.

Graig: Like I just mailed a letter — I call it the “granny letter”, one

piece of paper, handwritten, everything for $0.85 cents apiece.

Trent: And is it actually handwritten? I used to hire people off

Craigslist.

Graig: Uh-huh, not fun. Handwritten.

Trent: I’d just hire people off Craigslist and they’d come over to my house

and pick all the things up and they’d go home and watch TV and write them

all.

Graig: Are you being serious?

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: Oh, dude, there are mailing houses that could do that for you for

$0.85 cents.

Trent: This was years ago before I knew about any of this stuff.

Graig: Oh, okay. No, you’d be surprised, you’d be surprised with that

stuff. It’s pretty reasonable. The reason I like the PURL postcard is

because it’s personalized so people really get engaged with it and it’s

really inexpensive.

Trent: Any chance you’d send me a screenshot of one of these postcards that

I could include in the post?

Graig: Yeah, I can do it but I’m going to blur stuff out.

Trent: That’s fine.

Graig: Okay.

Trent: Is the message on the postcard pretty much the same message as on

the landing page that it’s driving them to?

Graig: Pretty close because, obviously, from being of Direct Response 101,

you do need congruency.

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: But you still never want to get away from the fact that you need to

get the click. You need to get the click and you need to get the traffic,

so don’t be too revealing in your message upfront. Give them enough to not

satisfy their appetite so that when they get to the landing page, they’re

like, “Ah, makes sense but it didn’t say it all on the copy.” Because

that’s what a lot of people do, they forget that they need to get that

click, so they give away way too much on the front end when just give away

your stuff later because you don’t want to satisfy their appetite by just

writing a bunch of great copy and them being like, “Oh, that was pretty

good, thanks. Well, see you later.”

Trent: Yeah. Yeah, I agree. Okay, and then let’s finish this off on

LinkedIn. Just talk very briefly about how you’re using LinkedIn.

Graig: Okay. Like no one else. Because everybody goes on there to solicit

and profile and go into groups and network and all that. Isn’t that what

most people use it for?

Trent: Probably, yeah.

Graig: Yeah, yeah, right. I don’t even go on there and do anything other

than run my ads. That’s it.

Trent: Okay.

Graig: Because one thing people need to understand about LinkedIn versus

Facebook — which I’m not saying don’t do Facebook, I’m saying do a lot of

things that make you money but let’s just talk about LinkedIn for a minute

— is it lets you specifically with, by the way, 100% accuracy, sort by

profession. So if you want to go after Fortune 500 CEOs, you can do that.

If you want to go after eye doctors, you can do that. Pinpoint that,

exactly that, so it really enables you to go by profession and that’s

really good for us sort of marketers and consultants because we really can

segment out the people that we want to go after.

I don’t use it for any of the social networking. I don’t network at all,

actually, and that’s not because I’m antisocial; that’s because I don’t

make money when I network and that’s actually good. We don’t use it for

that, we just use it for traffic, that’s it. Ads and traffic.

Trent: And ads are driving to like the Google Reviews landing page?

Graig: Yeah, sure, or various landing pages, yeah. Yeah.

Trent: In the ads, is it like Facebook, you can include a little image?

I’ve actually never advertised on LinkedIn yet.

Graig: Yeah, it’s actually the set-up for LinkedIn ads is simpler than

Facebook but it is an image and copy. They restrict you a little bit more

with the number of characters, but they also let you get away with a little

bit more than Facebook, so it’s kind of a give-and-take.

Trent: And what kind of images are you doing? Pretty girls with smiles?

Graig: Pretty girls, pretty girls.

Trent: Really? Seriously?

Graig: Oh, yeah, of course. That’s pretty much it. Pretty girls most of the

time.

Trent: And these pretty girls are dressed in business attire, I’m assuming?

Graig: No, sometimes bikinis.

Trent: You’re pulling my leg, right?

Graig: Nope.

Trent: And LinkedIn lets you do that?

Graig: Yup.

Trent: Because Facebook is ridiculously anal about that.

Graig: Yeah, they’re a little tougher. They’re loosening up a little bit

but, yeah, LinkedIn, they’ll let me — I’d probably embarrass you if you

saw some of the pictures I got away with on LinkedIn but they work, man.

But I’m going to say this, though, with a disclaimer, is the business that

I’m in happens to be very male-dominated. I think about 80% or higher are

males in dentistry. So, if you’re going after the holistic niche or, yeah,

females in it, still use pretty girls but don’t put them in bikinis. But I

still need to get people’s attention. I use pretty girls on all of my — I

even put them on my postcards.

Trent: Yeah, I still think you’re pulling my leg about the bikinis.

Graig: No, no, I’m not, I’m serious.

Trent: That’s awesome.

Graig: I’m not ashamed. I try to push it, because I know that if you’re

online and you’re looking at ads, you’re looking at thousands a day, so I

know that I’ve got to make that thing jump out at you.

Trent: Yup. I went to a workshop where the guy did a lot of paid ads.

Graig: Sure.

Trent: He even went so far — pretty girls were his images — that he would

split test how big their eyes were.

Graig: Oh, that’s funny.

Trent: He would split test which direction they were looking, whether it

was looking at the camera or away from the camera. It was insane, but this

guy’s running an eight- or nine-figure-a -year business. I can’t remember.

Graig: Yeah, no, I have friends like that, too, and they’ve tested cleavage

versus no cleavage, stuff like that, and cleavage got more clicks. That’s

very true but, to his defense, it probably depends on his market. Like I

said, mine happens to be a male-dominated industry where bikinis and

lingerie probably get clicks, but in other businesses it may not

essentially work.

Trent: So when you first started, you had to spend some money on LinkedIn

ads, sponsored e-mail, direct mail. How long did it take you to get that

money back?

Graig: Well, I ROI’ed out pretty quickly. I’d say it depends on the lead

source, though, but I didn’t do them all at one time. I had my lead sources

and I was like, “Okay, we’ll do this one, see how it goes.” This is

actually a good lesson. I don’t know the exact number of days, but I know

that I made money on it. Because here’s what a lot of people do when it

comes to marketing: they do a lead source campaign. In the lead source

campaign, they get a bunch of leads and they say, “Okay, well, we’ve got

100 leads, so I’m not going to do any more marketing until we make money

off that one campaign.”

Trent: They’re wrong.

Graig: They’re like, “Okay, so waiting, still waiting.” Whereas what if

that lead source just sucked? Or what if that lead source needed six months

to be nurtured before it converted? Maybe that’s just the way those people

are. So now you’ve done no marketing for six months because you’re still

“testing” this lead source, right? You’ve sat on your ass and made no

money, whereas when I did it — and I’m not saying this is the only way to

do it but it’s definitely a smarter way to do it — is I ran the campaign,

I got, say, 100 leads.

I knew I had the leads. I knew that they were going to be in Infusionsoft.

I knew that I could market to them forever. I knew I was going to give them

good content. So what I did was I waited until some more cash came in, just

a little bit of cash, and then I did another lead source campaign and then

I stacked them like that. Now I have 300 leads that I’m able to monetize

versus a six-month gap of just marketing to one particular customer and I

was able to build my list, my herd, right, because I just need more people.

Sometimes it’s just pure numbers. Sometimes 100 people in your niche just

isn’t going to cut it to get a customer. Maybe you need 300 people to get a

customer. So a lot of people do that one-and-done marketing, that one-shot,

“Oh, I’m going to do one direct mail campaign,” “Oh, I’m going to do one

thing” — and then they sit and they wait. Sometimes you waiting may cost

you your business.

Trent: Yep, because cash flow is king.

Graig: Right, right. The thing is that, especially when you start a

business, you don’t really know the life cycle of your customer. You don’t

know it might take seven months to close someone, so you’ve kind of got to

get your marketing in order and just stagger it and go out six months and

then look at it and say, “Okay, on average it took us four months to get a

client. Now we know that,” as before you may not have known that.

Trent: How long did it take you to get your first client?

Graig: A week.

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: A week, but you know why was because I knew the basics of what it

was going to take to get a client. What I mean by that is in the first week

of being in business, I hosted a live teleseminar where I got 50 dentists

on and I sold my first product.

Trent: How’d you get those 50?

Graig: Various lead sources opting-in to a landing page. The life lesson

there is I didn’t focus on anything but just selling them on the one thing.

I needed eyeballs and I needed ears and I had a product. I just needed them

to listen to it and I put them on a telecall and I think I sold five in

that one night.

Trent: So the machine began.

Graig: Then the matrix started, that’s right.

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: But how many people do you know spend the first two weeks of

business making up a website and business cards and a logo?

Trent: Yeah.

Graig: I had an e-mail address. I didn’t even have a website and I made

thousands in a day.

Trent: I interviewed a guy by the name of Sam Ovens yesterday and he has a

marketing consulting business and he put up a one-page website. He didn’t

have a business card, he didn’t have a business plan, he didn’t know what

he was going to sell and he didn’t know who he was going to sell it to. He

just started to reach out to everyone he knew and he said, “Hey, I’m pretty

knowledgeable about online marketing and I’m looking for clients to help.”

Graig: Yep.

Trent: And one, two, three, four, five, six, seven clients later, he

started figuring out what they really wanted, who he should really be

selling to, and what he should really be selling and he figured out that

his sweet spot was selling to high-ticket B2B companies for the same

reasons that you explained at the very beginning of this interview, was

because their customer value was between $50,000 and $100,000.

Check this out — he would go to one of these companies and say, “I can

make your website produce more qualified leads for you.” “Okay.” And he

would tweak — so these people wouldn’t even have an opt-in form.

Graig: Right.

Trent: So he’d fix the headline, fix the sales copy, put on in opt-in form,

basic autoresponder, and charge $10,000.

Graig: Yup.

Trent: But these customers are like, “Well, if I could get one more

customer per year, that’s $50,000 and I only have to pay this guy $10,000.

Yeah, sign me up.”

Graig: I have a lot of friends that do exactly what he does and it’s very

true. It’s very true and that’s just the basics of it. I mean, Trent, I

still to this day, we’re talking three-and-a-half years later, I still

don’t have a business card.

Trent: If you’re not going networking, then what in the hell do you need

one for?

Graig: Oh, yeah, that’s a whole other hour podcast right there but, yeah,

no, and that’s exactly it and that’s the thing is a lot of people don’t

understand is I still do deals. So a lot of people associate networking

with deals, getting deals done. I still do deals all the time. It’s made me

a lot of money, don’t get me wrong, but I don’t do them where I go and I

peddle around my business card at stupid conferences.

What I did is I elevated myself to a certain stature that allowed people to

be attracted to me, not the other way around, so now all I have to do is

ask. So if I want one of my friends to send an e-mail out for me, they’re

my friends now because of the respect that they have for me, not because I

handed them and peddled them business cards at conferences and they just

say, “Yeah, I’ll send it out for you.” Because I’ve elevated that stature,

as opposed to saying, “Hey, call me, let’s get something together.”

Trent: And, folks in the audience, if you’re listening to this and going,

“Yeah, I’d like to elevate my stature,” I have three words for you: start a

podcast.

Graig: Start a podcast. That’s true. It’s very true. Write a book. Get

featured in press releases.

Trent: Blog.

Graig: Actually, you know what? Can I do a shameless plug and it’s not for

me, it’s for one of my friends who does a really good job with this, a

really good job?

Trent: Yeah. Please do.

Graig: If you want to be the authority in your particular arena or you just

want to be able to hang your hat on more notoriety — because nobody argues

with an expert, no one argues with Dr. Oz or Suze Orman about financial

stuff, even though they’re average in their profession. You would think

they’re phenomenal.

If you utilize my friend Brian Horn, he’s got a website, I think it’s

horndogsearch.com or something like that or beonpageone.com. You just

Google “Brian Horn SEO” and he will help you. He has done a phenomenal job

with helping his clients in all sorts of businesses from dentists to

Fortune 500 CEOs on how to get featured in local media, Wall Street

Journal, and syndicate you all over the dang place so, that way, you can

put all of those labels on your authority badge. You’re “as seen on CBS,

FOX News, CBS Sports,” whatever you’re in. He does a phenomenal job with it

and that’s an easy way to become an authority where you can garner more

respect from not only your peers, but your clients and customers and

prospects. So that’s a shameless plug for Brian but he’s good at it.

Trent: I was going to ask you about that because I noticed you had “ABC,

NBC, CBS, FOX, blah blah blah,” Brian Horn, did you work with him to be

able to do that?

Graig: I did and Brian’s a really good friend of mine. He’s in my

MasterMind group with me, and he’s phenomenal at it. He’s phenomenal at it.

Yeah, I was even in Newsweek Magazine as a featured person and, by the way,

guys, you can pay to be in all that stuff. It’s not special. I mean, it’s

special to the outside world, but it’s not that hard.

Trent: So you mentioned a word near and dear to my heart: MasterMind group.

For folks, if you’re listening, Bright Ideas is about to launch a

MasterMind group for people that want to learn how to build a local

marketing agency to serve dentists. Why, Graig, do you think MasterMind

groups are so valuable?

Graig: Well, I mean, it’s the whole adage of the power of the MasterMind. I

mean, the simplest way to explain it is many brains is better than one. So

you’re automatically multiplying what can be done in a room. For example,

if Trent and I sat down in a room together and I told him my biggest

problems and biggest ideas, he may just look at me and say, “Well, here’s

what I would do and what I’ve done.” But what if you had seven Trents in

that room? It’s the ultimate multiplier.

Anyone who’s not part of a MasterMind, you should just be in one. I don’t

care, be in at least just one. Most successful people are in more than one,

but be in just at least one and that’s really it because when I go to

MasterMind and I’m like, “Okay, here’s what I’m seeing,” not only can they

help me, but when I say, “I’m doing this that’s working,” I have 8 to 10

other eyeballs in the room helping me out with that, versus just one.

Versus just a coach. It’s not just a coach, it’s a room of experts.

Trent: What do you pay to be in yours?

Graig: The one that I’m in is actually sort of, it’s like Fight Club.

Trent: Yeah?

Graig: So we don’t even tell people where we meet. We call each other,

we’re the “SEO Mafia” is what we say, so I can’t tell you that or they’ll

kill me. They won’t kill me literally but we don’t talk about it. But in

all honesty, I think paying around anywhere from $20,000 to $25,000 a year

for a MasterMind is not a bad investment.

Trent: Yeah, because you’re around other people who can afford to pay

$20,000 to $25,000 a year.

Graig: Yeah, and the other thing is don’t just join a MasterMind group of

average people, right? You want to be in a room with seven- or eight-figure-

earners. So if you were to be in Joe Posh’s $25,000 group or something like

that, you know you’re going into that room and there’s going to be other

millionaires in that room. That’s a good place to be.

Trent: Yeah, absolutely.

Graig: It’s a real good place to be.

Trent: I guess I’d better raise the price of my MasterMind.

Graig: Double it, double it.

Trent: Actually, as of this recording, I have not decided yet how much I’m

going to charge. I’m off to Washington D.C. the tail-end of this week,

actually, to do a meeting which will be instrumental to my figuring out

what the pricing will be and what will be included.

Graig: Nice.

Trent: So details to come, folks.

Graig: Nice.

Trent: All right, Graig, let’s wrap this up. We’ve done a long one here,

but, man, this has been super-awesome and thank you for that.

Graig: Yeah, I know we went over but I think everybody’s going to get a

good idea of things. If people are looking to get more information like on

me and so on and so forth, not necessarily me itself but sort of how I look

at marketing, is if you go to 7figurelocalmarketer.com — that’s where

you’re going to be able to get my free report on how I’ve really built my

business. The dentist stuff is good to talk about but that’s where all your

people are going to want to go.

Trent: Okay, I’ll make sure that I link to that from the show notes, as

well.

Graig: Yeah, yeah. That’s where they’ll want to be.

Trent: And do you have an affiliate link for whatever that is?

Graig: I can set one up for you, Trent. That’s not a problem.

Trent: Okay, cool. All right, so unless there’s anything else, Graig, that

you want to add to this.

Graig: No, this was good, this was fun.

Trent: Yeah, thank you very much for making the time. I hope that people

who are listening to this were both educated and inspired by your story as

I was and thanks for being on the show.

Graig: No problem.

Trent: Okay, to get the show notes for today’s episode, go to

brightideas.co/70. And while you’re in front of your computer, I’d love it

if you would take a minute and go to brightideas.co/love. If you’ve enjoyed

this episode, there will be a pre-populated tweet that you can click and,

as well, there’s a link to the iTunes store where you can go and leave

feedback for the show and for this episode. If you would take a moment and

do that, it would make a huge difference because it helps the show to get

more awareness and more people can listen to it and we can help more

entrepreneurs to massively boost their business.

Thanks very much for tuning in. I’m your host, Trent Dyrsmid, and I look

forward to seeing you in the next episode. Take care, have a wonderful day.

Announcer: Thanks very much for listening to the Bright Ideas podcast.

Check us out on the web at brightideas.co.

About Graig Presti

graigGraig Presti, founder and CEO of LocalSearchForDentists.com, is a foremost advertising authority who operates with dental practices all around the planet, assisting them to leverage the internet so they can generate more telephone calls, reach more new patients, and bring in more revenue. His strategies begin to work immediately and continue to work month after month.

Presti specializes in helping dental practices dominate their nearby location by using confirmed regional Internet dental advertising strategies to help them dominate the top rated regional research engines like Google, Yahoo and Bing.

Presti uses easy to understand stories to help his clients comprehend how they can improve their internet presence. He is a repeated featured speaker at dental conferences and other venues.

Presti has mastered the art of bringing a flood of new patients into dental offices, and has undoubtedly established himself as a top specialist in his field. His considerable accomplishments, and his industry contributions, led him to be showcased as a Newsweek Magazine Champion of Health, Wealth and Success.

How to Start a Marketing Consulting Business and Go From Zero to $35,000 a Month in Only 12 Months – with Sam Ovens

Do you think you need a fancy website, and business card, and plenty of startup capital to start a business? If you do, you’re dead wrong.

Do you think you need a fancy website, and business card, and plenty of startup capital to start a business? If you do, you’re dead wrong.

Sam Ovens started his marketing consulting business with no clue of what he was going to sell, no idea who would buy it, no idea how he’d actually deliver the work, and with no savings to speak of.

In this interview, you’ll hear Sam and I talk about:

  • (4:37) His number of customers and revenue
  • (8:00) His background, and how he got started
  • (10:30) His start as a marketing consultant
  • (13:00) How he used email to get his first clients
  • (16:00) How success led to more success
  • (19:00) How he made $10,000 sales, and closed $20,000 deals with $3k/mo in retainer fees
  • (23:00) How he used lumpy mail to find his leads
  • (25:30) How he delivered services using elance
  • (30:30) How he transitioned to a trusted advisor
  • (34:30) The difference between a service business and a product business
  • (38:30) The cons of a product business
  • (40:00) The cost of version 1
  • (42:00) His Big Business mindset
  • (48:00) How he used Idea Extraction to get his rich niche to tell him their pain
  • (51:00) How he researched Property Management
  • (58:00) Mistakes he made along the way

Links

More About This Episode

The Bright Ideas podcast is the podcast for business owners and marketers who want to discover how to use online marketing and sales automation tactics to massively grow their business.

It’s designed to help marketing agencies and small business owners discover which online marketing strategies are working most effectively today – all from the mouths of expert entrepreneurs who are already making it big.

Listen Now

Leave some feedback:

Connect with Trent Dyrsmid:

Transcript

Trent: Hey there, bright idea hunters. Welcome to the Bright Ideas podcast.

I’m your host, Trent Dyrsmid, and this is the podcast for marketing

consultants, marketing agencies, and entrepreneurs who want to discover how

to use content marketing and marketing automation to massively boost their

business.On the show with me today is an entrepreneur by the name of Sam Ovens. Sam

is the founder of a very rapidly-growing company by the name of

SnapInspect. Just over a year ago, Sam barely even knew what an

entrepreneur was. He literally had to actually Google the term when he

first discovered it and that was a little bit longer ago. With that said,

this interview, if you are a new entrepreneur looking for a business to

start or you are already a marketing consultant looking to grow your

business, this interview is going to be absolutely a mind-blower for you.I don’t want to sound too hype-y, but I took so many notes for myself when

I was doing this interview with Sam that I absolutely promise that if you

invest the time to listen to it, you are going to come away from this

interview with some of the most valuable insights possible that will

literally be for you, as they were for Sam, massive game-changers.His app, his company, SnapInspect — so a year ago, nothing, didn’t exist.

He had to figure out how to find the idea, how to get it built, how to pay

for it, and then how to turn it into a very healthy six-figure business and

he did all of that in just over a year. And keep in mind, beforehand, this

guy barely even knew what an entrepreneur was. So get some pen and paper,

sit down. You are absolutely going to love this interview.Before I get to it, I want to really quickly tell you about something if

you’re listening, if you’re not yet a Bright Ideas subscriber, I’ve got a

new four-part video series called the Conversion Tactics Toolbox. It

teaches you — shows you, actually; it’s free–exactly how I get bright

ideas to add so many subscribers every day to my newsletter list and

therefore my marketing funnel and, of course, that causes products to sell.

Go sign up at brightideas.co.So, with that said, get ready, here we go. This is going to be a really

good one. Please join me in welcoming Sam to the show. Hey, Sam, welcome to

the show. Thanks for making the time.Sam Ovens: Glad to be here.Trent: So for the folks who don’t yet have a clear understanding of who you

are, take a minute and just please briefly introduce yourself. Tell us who

you are and what you do.Sam: Okay, so I started a software as a service company called SnapInspect,

which is basically a property inspection app for property management

companies. They use it to inspect rental properties and create reports.

Yeah, so that’s basically what I did.Trent: Is this your first entrepreneurial venture?

Sam: First successful one, yes, but including the failed ones, it’s

probably my third or fourth.

Trent: Okay.

Sam: Yeah.

Trent: All right, so you’re at a point now where you’re having quite a bit

of success. So let’s talk a little bit about where you are today and then I

want to back this up to the process that you went through and how you

started off as a marketing consultant and used that money to fund this and

where there’s a whole lot of really good stuff I want to get into. But so

that people know where you’re at, because you’ve accomplished quite a bit

here in the last year since you launched the product, I really kind of want

them to know the conclusion first, so maybe we can talk about number of

customers and revenue, how’s that sound?

Sam: Sure.

Trent: All right, so how many customers and how much revenue?

Sam: So, last time I checked, we’re around 1,400 paid customers and revenue

is around about $400,000 annually.

Trent: Very nice. And on a software business, how much of that is making it

to the bottom-line? Quite a bit, I would think.

Sam: I mean, our expenses run roughly right now about $16,000 a month, so

you could do the maths on that.

Trent: The point of it is — and this is what I wanted people to get —

because here you are, this guy who fell on his face a couple of times

beforehand and then finally, when you got it figured out, within a year

you’ve made a massive transformation to your life as a result of this

business. Would that be an overstatement, do you think, or do you think

that that’s pretty accurate?

Sam: No, I think it’s pretty accurate. I’ve tried to be an entrepreneur for

probably, I think, three years now, maybe not quite three but close to. Two

of those years, I was practically just spinning my tires and then when

things sort of clicked for me, which was about a year ago, it just all

moved so rapidly. SnapInspect is one year old in August. SnapInspect is

only one year old and all of my business stuff has really snowballed in the

last 12 months and it’s been a pretty crazy 12 months.

Trent: And a lot of fun, too, I’ll bet.

Sam: Oh, yeah. It’s fun finally making money.

Trent: Yeah.

Sam: Instead of just finding ways to get more to spend.

Trent: Yeah, funny how that is. Being an entrepreneur is so much more fun

when you’re making a profit. All right, so let’s talk a little bit about

your background and then how you got into this and how you were a marketing

consultant, because a lot of my audience — and I really think this is

going to be a great interview for them — they’re either a new entrepreneur

like you were before this success came your way or they are a marketing

consultant looking to grow their business to the point where it’s providing

a very nice level of income for them and maybe some of them are at a point

where they’re already there and they’re thinking, “Well, how do I take my

business to the next level?” The pieces of your story, I think, will speak

to all of those people, so let’s kind of dive into that.

What did you take in college? What did you do before this? Were you born in

this entrepreneur whiz-bang family with a big silver spoon or is it

something other than that?

Sam: Sure. No one in my family is an entrepreneur or even in business. My

mum’s a teacher and my dad’s a builder and none of my friends are even

entrepreneurial. I think back home in New Zealand, I don’t even think I

know another entrepreneur and I never really was entrepreneurial. I mean, I

was obsessive with things, like if it was a hobby or a sport or whatever it

was, I’d always have something I was quite obsessed with and spend all day

and all night thinking about it and something like that.

Those are the only early traces I could think of what’s led to today

because I remember my parents and teachers always said to me, “If only you

could just get obsessed with school or college or doing something

productive instead of,” because my obsessions used to be race cars or go-

karting or something like that and that was me spending money and taking

time away from studying, so my grades were always below average and

everything.

Then I don’t know when the click was. I think it was, I went to a friend’s,

her dad was a very successful businessman and I went away to their island —

the guy owned an island — and I was sitting there and I was like, “Oh my

God, this is so awesome,” and then when I got back, I was like, “I want to

do that.” I think the first thing, my first move was Googling, “What is

entrepreneurship?”

Trent: No kidding, wow.

Sam: Not even kidding, just trying to get a definition on it because I’d

asked this girl, “What does your dad do?” And she’s like, “Oh, he’s an

entrepreneur,” and I was like, “I want to be one of those.” So I went back

and I Googled it and I bought a bunch of books and I guess that’s where the

journey began and that was roughly three years ago.

Trent: Wow, that’s cool. All right, so you fell on your face a few times

and we’re going to skip past those just because there’s so much good stuff

that I want to talk about what’s worked for you.

Sam: Sure.

Trent: Then you, at some point, started working for yourself as a marketing

consultant, is that correct?

Sam: Correct.

Trent: Okay, so when was that?

Sam: I joined The Foundation in October of 2011 and I learned a lot there

about how to start a software company from scratch. I got the idea for

SnapInspect and we started developing it, but I quickly realized I’m going

to run out of money. Development builds were coming in because we had

milestones with the original developers and I never even knew how I was

going to pay the next milestone, so I was constantly trying to figure out

ways, see which banks were offering student credit cards, trying to just

come up with money any way just to pay the development bills.

Then I was looking, I was talking to my developer like, “What do you think

server costs are going to be?” He gave me some numbers and I was adding up

the numbers and I was like, “Oh my God, I’ve got an awesome idea for a

company. This company’s going to work, but I don’t know if I’m going to be

able to keep it alive long enough for it to actually gain traction.”

So I quickly realized that I’m going to need a source of income to support

starting SnapInspect. At that point, I knew a bit about marketing and I

figured, “Well, these skills are probably helpful to other business,” so I

decided that I’d help consult other businesses on marketing and basically

sell my own services and use that cash to help get SnapInspect started and

survive through the early stages.

Trent: So let’s talk about how you did that. You’ve got no customers,

you’ve got some marketing skills which you’ve acquired as the product of,

presumably, your failures along the way. You’re out there trying to figure

out how to do stuff, it’s all on the line and you can’t help but learn

things. Then you made a decision, “Well, I’m going to go get some clients

because I need some cash flow or my business is not going to succeed,” so I

want to know what did you do — and I’m sure my audience would like to

know, especially the new entrepreneurs who are thinking, “Man, this guy’s

story sounds like mine,” — what did you do to get those clients?

Sam: Sure. My first attempt, like any of my first attempts, was pretty

weak. I just reached out to people I knew because I didn’t even know what I

was selling. I was like, “I know all of this stuff,” but I couldn’t put

into a sentence what I was selling. So it sort of started out with getting

a few cheap $2,000 or $3,000 website deals where I’d essentially just be an

order taker and help a business rejig their website and that’s how it

started.

Trent: These were all people initially that you knew? But you didn’t have

any credibility with them as a marketing or a website developer, did you?

Sam: No, not at all. I just reached out via e-mail. They knew I was in this

whole online space, which most people don’t understand that most business

owners, outside of the tech and San Francisco space, they actually don’t

know anything about websites and so you don’t need to know much to be an

expert. In fact, most of the people that probably had the ability to find

your content and listen to it probably know more than enough to actually be

valuable to 95% of the businesses in the world. You don’t actually need to

be that much of an engineer to help other people out. Now I’ve side-tracked

myself, what was the question?

Trent: It’s okay, it’s okay. I couldn’t agree more. I think that is

something people overestimate or maybe underestimate, I don’t know what the

right word is, but they think they need to be this guru before they could

ever go to a small business owner that runs any kind of small business

that’s in your town and say to them, “I can help you with your marketing.”

So limiting belief number one that hope Sam has just smashed for you guys

is that you already know enough. If you found my site and you’re listening

to this interview and you know what WordPress is and you know what hosting

is, you already know enough.

Okay, so you sent some e-mails, you got some clients, $2,000 gigs, $3,000

gigs here and there. Is that about right?

Sam: Yup.

Trent: What happened next?

Sam: So that was enough money. From what I was making, that was a big

change. I mean, $2,000, $3,000 compared to zero? Pretty sweet, so I was

pretty happy with myself and I did quite a few of those and then I guess

the more I thought about it and the more of these little deals that I won,

the more confidence I got and I sort of found my foothold and my market in

exactly what it was that I did. So instead of being a consultant that

literally would do anything for money, I now had a very specific thing that

I did for a specific market.

Trent: Which was what?

Sam: So I would help B2B companies, so B2B companies that had high-ticket

priced items generate more leads with their websites.

Trent: Okay, so did you do that by helping them to do better conversions or

more traffic?

Sam: The beauty of this was that it was so much easier than doing even the

$2,000 deals because essentially what I would do is I’d put just such basic

stuff, like their websites would have headlines and basic copy which,

instead of saying, “We are the best. We, we, we,” it would talk a little

bit about the other person, the customer and what pains they’re

experiencing. So I’d rejig the copy, put a headline in and I’d create some

sort of lead capture system, which would just be usually a like a MailChimp

opt-in form for a free consultation or a pricing booklet or some sort of

information thing that they had. Most of the time, they had these in their

business; they just weren’t putting them to work.

Trent: So this is really basic stuff for us but, again, for these small

business owners, they had no idea how to do this stuff. So how much were

you able to charge to do this?

Sam: Well, so, my average–to do something simple as that, I would charge

$10,000.

Trent: $10,000?

Sam: Yup.

Trent: To tweak a headline, fix sales copy, put a lead capture form on,

presumably write some kind of autoresponder sequence on behind-the-scenes,

and get them to take some content they already had and turn it into a free

report/lead magnet, $10,000 for that?

Sam: Yup.

Trent: I hope, my beloved audience, this is sinking in for you guys.

Sam: Well, you’ve go tot understand that they didn’t know that they needed

that. If they knew that they needed that, they could do it themselves or

they could hire someone on Elance to whack it together for a couple hundred

dollars, but . . .

Trent: But they don’t know that.

Sam: It’s the advantage of not being an order taker but an advisor or an

expert and knowing exactly what you’d do because the beauty of B2B high-

ticket item companies is one sale to them is usually worth $50,000 to

$100,000.

Trent: Yup.

Sam: They’re already making plenty of sales and they’re making them through

their website with people going to the “Contact Us” form and filling out,

like, 15 fields, which was hard to find and I was thinking, “My God, if we

could remove some of this friction, rejig the copy, even if I just got them

one more in a whole year, it’s still worth it for them to pay me $10,000.”

Trent: Absolutely.

Sam: And I did. They got way more than one a year so as far as they were

concerned, they were away laughing. They only had to pay me $10,000 but

that’s the thing about pricing on value instead of cost.

Trent: Mm-hmm.

Sam: The whole time, I anchor my deals on what’s a new client worth to you.

They know it’s $50,000, $100,000 and if we can get at least one or two more

of those a month, they’re sorted. That’s the advantage, that’s why I picked

that as my niche and as my specialty because once I had one of those under

my belt and I could get a testimonial, I just started reaching out to more

of them that were in the same situation and it was easy. I’d put retainers,

I started to build retainers in and I started to charge more.

I did contracts where I’d implement a CRM system too. For example, a

company, it would need the website rejigged, it would need testimonials —

which I’d have to find — it might include lead capture, basic

autoresponder, and then it would have to feed into a CRM system, which you

wouldn’t even believe that a $10 million a year company didn’t even have a

CRM.

Trent: They probably didn’t even know what it was.

Sam: I put a CRM in place, showed the team how to use it, we talked about

all of this new stuff. It was fun. I learned a ton doing it. The owner

loved it, the company profited wildly from it and that was a $25,000 deal

with a $3,000 a month retainer and still not even touching on any of the

stuff that the guys in your audience know, like split-testing and what

button colors convert. Forget that! This is simple stuff, right?

Trent: I’m loving that you’re sharing this because this is a perfect

example in this video that I mentioned to you before that’s on YouTube that

I get all these views on and we talked about before — I talk about my

green dot theory and it’s more or less the best way to succeed in business

is to be in business. Because once you start — and this is what I hope

that my new entrepreneurs who are listening to this will understand — you

don’t need a great idea to start, you just need to start. Then along the

way, like what happened to you, Sam, is the byproduct of the journey is

that you start discovering these rich niches that I talk about, the

importance of selling to businesses that have a high customer value, and

you discovered all the stuff. You didn’t think this up on a whiteboard and

say, “That’s what I’m going to do,” right?

Sam: Oh, so far from it, it’s ridiculous.

Trent: Yeah, fantastic stuff. Okay, and how, by the way — because I know

some people are probably thinking this — how did you find these companies

to go and you contacted them via e-mail always to begin with, was that

correct?

Sam: I tried lots of things and over time, again, I adapted my process. In

the end, my secret weapon was lump e-mail.

Trent: I love so much you just mentioned that because that’s one thing that

we’re starting to do, as well.

Sam: Yeah, that was my secret weapon in the end. I could send out pieces

and I knew that I was going to get a new client. I knew what my conversions

were off that and it worked, it really worked and I never paid for any . .

. I never used AdWords, never had Facebook, never had a blog. I mean, I

didn’t have anything. I didn’t even have a business card.

Trent: Did you have a website? You had a website?

Sam: Well, I mean, if you looked at samovens.com, it’s one static page that

just says “Direct Marketing Consultant.” The website took me five minutes

to build.

Trent: Mm-hmm.

Sam: It pays to note I don’t even know how to use WordPress. I built my

website using Unbounce.

Trent: I love it.

Sam: I still don’t know how to set up a WordPress website.

Trent: I love it. So how when you were actually working with these clients

and you wanted to fix a headline and improve copy and put the webform on,

did you just give them the code for the webform and have their team make

the tweaks on their own sites?

Sam: That’s a really good question. That’s the other part of it: I never

did any of the actual work. So I would win the deal — that part is

important — I put a lot of my effort into winning the deal and that was

where I spent the bulk of my time. Then I would sit down with the business

owner and I’d ask him questions to learn about how we’re going to rejig the

site and how we’re going to generate leads.

Generally, he would give me all the information I needed and then I would

set aside a day or two to write the copy and I’d design all of the pages,

I’d just write them up in either Keynote or later on I used Unbound, but I

started out using Keynote, and I had a guy that I hired from Elance who

would do all of my implementation.

So I’d essentially win the deal, create a list of what needed to be done,

jump on Skype with my guy from Elance, brief him. He’d go and do it all —

like build the website, put the code on, do the style, all of that stuff

that I didn’t know how to do — and we had an awesome arrangement where he

charged a flat fee regardless of how long it took: $200 to do the

implementation.

Trent: $200. So you’re selling a deal for $10,000 and it’s costing you $200

to deliver it, right?

Sam: Yup, yup.

Trent: I hope there are people listening to this podcast right now with

their jaw hanging open and then kicking themselves in the butt because

they’re doing too much analysis and too much paralysis before they get

going.

Sam: It sounds illegal, right? But what people aren’t understanding is that

I’m not selling the doing. If these people knew what they wanted, they

could go directly to the Elance guy.

Trent: But they don’t.

Sam: I’m the one that’s telling them what they need, like I’m creating the

real value. The real value isn’t in doing. The real value isn’t in typing

the code or putting the MailChimp form on the page. There’s no value in

that. That’s a commodity. You can hire people all over the world on Elance

that’ll do that for next-to-nothing. The real value is in knowing how to

get the client more customers.

Trent: Mm-hmm, and knowing what the client needs when they don’t know

themselves.

Sam: Yeah, and the best part about it is you get treated with so much more

respect when you’re not an order taker.

Trent: Mm-hmm.

Sam: Back in the day when I did $2k and $3k website deals, I mean, I’d show

them the site and they’d send me back a list of, like, 50 things to change,

like “move the logo a little bit to the left, a little bit to the right,

color of the font doesn’t look right,” just stuff like that and it killed

me because you’re essentially an order taker — you’re not an adviser or an

expert — and they don’t listen to anything you say because you’re

essentially just that Elance guy except a more glorified version that gets

paid $2,000 instead of $200.

That’s essentially what I was but when you’re the adviser and the expert,

they don’t fight you on anything. You never hear about a logo placement or

a color because what they’re hiring you for is the added revenue they’re

going to get, the customers. They don’t care about anything else and that’s

the way it should be. So, honestly, it really changed how I did the whole

marketing consulting thing because I went from busting my ass doing $2,000,

$3,000 deals to doing $10,000 to $20,000 deals where I was treated like

someone that was valuable and also not having a fight with the customer

over the color of a logo.

Trent: Just so that I make sure myself and the audience is crystal-clear on

the difference, the differences between starving consultant Sam and getting-

rich consultant Sam — and we haven’t even talked about your SaaS yet,

which we’re still going to get to — is you decided, number one, to focus

on a different niche, the rich niche, these high-ticket B2B companies. Then

you used your lump e-mail to get in touch with them and you positioned

yourself deliberately through the questions, I’m assuming, that you asked

them as a trusted adviser. Is that pretty much the difference between

“starving” and “getting-rich”?

Sam: Yeah, so, first of all, I mean, I would target companies that had

money to spend and I’d target companies where I honestly believed that if I

was to do what I wanted to do to their website, that they would value from

it more than what they would pay me. Because a lot of the deals I did early

on when I was what you’re calling a “poor consultant,” I honestly thought —

and there was no real added value to the company. I mean, sure their

website looked nicer, but I didn’t feel, I felt like this is a waste of

their $2,000, $3,000; it just looks prettier.

But with these other companies, I was happy to charge $10,000 or more

because they got the value from it. It sounds criminal and I used to feel a

little bit shady doing it but then when I really thought about it, because

a lot of the time after I had these big customers with $10,000, $15,000,

$20,000, $25,000, I felt guilty. I was like, “Oh my God, they’re going to e-

mail me two months later and they’re going to be like, ‘We want our money

back.'” But it was the exact opposite.

They told other people about me and I started getting referrals and they

loved it. They were like, “There’s a big difference,” and the people I did

$2,000 or $3,000 websites for, they still call me today because they say

something like their website isn’t loading fast enough. I mean, the

difference is I can’t even define.

Trent: Well, you’re doing a pretty good job of it so far and I hope that

the incredibly valuable message that you are sharing right now is sinking

in with the people that are listening to this. Folks, if you have

questions, there’s going to be a comment form on the blog post where this

interview is published. Make sure you use it and either Sam or myself will

answer them.

All right, so I kind of want to transition the interview now to the

SnapInspect story. So, obviously what you’ve shared with us so far has

communicated how you got some cash flow so that you could build this other

business, which has a bunch of pros and cons. Before we get too much into

SnapInspect — and this is something that when I was a new entrepreneur, I

didn’t know anything about — there are some pros and cons to a consulting

business and there are some pros and cons to a software business. I don’t

think many people, especially in the beginning, even have the belief system

that they could ever possibly even create a software business.

So, very quickly, just tell us the pros and cons of the consulting model

and the pros and cons, mostly what you just told me before the interview,

the pros and cons of the software model.

Sam: Consulting is one specific example but it’s really the pros and cons

of any service business and the pros and cons of any product-based

business.

Trent: Sure.

Sam: But in my specific example, I’m going to use consulting and SaaS. The

pros and cons of a consulting business or a service business is, the pros:

you can get into business immediately. All you really need is a laptop and

a cell phone, plus the barriers to entry, there’s none. You don’t need to

build a product, you don’t need to invest in development and it doesn’t

cost anything or really anything. You can get into business straight away.

The other pros of the consulting business is you start to make decent money

pretty quickly so I started to make $3,000 where I had to pay my developer

$200. That was still $2,800 and while that’s not much money, that was a lot

to me back then, more than what my product business could do at the time,

so it can generate cash pretty quickly. Within a year, the consulting

business got pretty big. I grew it up to $35,000 a month.

Trent: Within a year.

Sam: Yep.

Trent: Fantastic.

Sam: It’s still at that today and, yeah, that was quick. It grew to $10,000

a month so much faster than SnapInspect did and the profitability of it was

much higher. It was very profitable. It was pretty much a cash business.

Now, the cons of a service business or a consulting business: firstly,

there’s no asset value. If you’ve got a consulting business, someone’s not

going to come along and acquire it because you are the business. It doesn’t

have an asset value, it doesn’t have a multiplier. You can’t say, “Well, I

earned $100,000 this year and using a ten times multiplier, the market cap

for my consulting practice is a $1,000,000.” That doesn’t work.

Trent: I do want to interject, though, from my own experience, I did have a

service business but it wasn’t just me — I had a dozen employees and we

had a lot of recurring revenue, MRR, monthly recurring revenue — and I

sold it for $1.2 million because the asset value was the recurring revenue

with the people behind it to do it all, so I just want to make sure that

the audience understands that service businesses can have an asset value if

you build them correctly. Not as good, necessarily, as software, but–

Sam: You want to make sure you are not the business.

Trent: Correct.

Sam: But I was the business, so if you can make your consulting or service

business run without you and it’s got some sort of reliable income that’s

predictable . . .

Trent: That doesn’t depend upon you.

Sam: Yes, then, absolutely, that’s a real business, that’s an asset. But

most consulting, it’s essentially the person, it’s just them and people buy

because it’s them and you can’t leave. So, yeah, you’re right, thanks for

correcting me, but my one was I definitely had no multiplier.

Trent: Mm-hmm.

Sam: And so–where was I, that was my con . . .

Trent: Yeah, now you’re going to talk about, I believe . . .

Sam: And also scaling.

Trent: Okay.

Sam: To scale a consulting business, there really is only two ways: one is

to charge more; the other is to work more hours; or the other one, which is

actually hiring more people, and there’s a limit on how high you can scale.

Now, on a product business, the cons: there’s barriers to entry. You have

to have a product. To do that, you need to develop it, you need to work

with developers, you need to pay money to build the product, test it, all

that stuff. That takes time, so speed-to-market, cost-to-enter is high, and

then also when you launch, you’re not making much money.

I mean, I had about 10 customers when I launched, paying around $150 a

month, that $1,500 a month. That’s still pretty good but my costs were

higher than that, so I was losing money and I was losing money for quite a

long time. Eventually it starts to pick up and scale but by the time it

gets out of that trough, it’s sucked up a fair bit of time and money.

Trent: How much do you think you burned through before you achieved

breakeven?

Sam: I don’t want to scare people — to get the product to market, version

one to market with 10 paying customers, cost me about $10,000.

Trent: Okay.

Sam: To build it up to where it is today, it’s not that same $10,000

product. There’s been a developer full-time on it for over a year now,

developing every single day. We’ve really built it out and invested in it.

I mean, it’s more than six figures — I don’t mean more than six figures,

but in the six figures range.

Trent: Mm-hmm.

Sam: So it’s under $300k but above $100k.

Trent: Yeah, it cost me probably close to $300,000 and several years before

my service business — which was not just me, it had a staff, so it had an

asset play achieved to break even. It’s expensive.

Sam: Yeah. Now, and also I don’t want to scare people off of the product

business costing that much. To get in there and to start selling, $10,000,

but I grew it without investing much money to a pretty decent income where

it was profitable pretty quickly, within six months. But I had this

realization that I just didn’t want a six-figure product business. I really

wanted a big business, like multi-millions, and so I figured, all right,

it’s time to turn the company into a loss and start making a loss with a

plan to scale.

Trent: But you had your consulting revenue to cover the loss for you.

Sam: Precisely, so I’ve always been a massive fan of big business. A lot of

people like lifestyle and all that sort of stuff but me, I’ve always been a

massive fan of just big business and so I’ve always followed people like

Warren Buffett and J.P. Morgan and Rockefeller and all of those guys and

been fascinated with how they think. I was reading the letters of Warren

Buffett–have you ever read those?

Trent: No, I have not.

Sam: Letters he writes to his Berkshire Hathaway . . .

Trent: Oh, yeah, the shareholders’ letters. I have.

Sam: Yeah, yeah, the shareholders’ letters and I was reading them, I still

read them. In it Buffett and Munger, Charlie Munger, were talking about

this concept of cash float, which is they use insurance companies such as

GEICO and I think they’re the largest insurance company holder in the

world, and they use insurance companies to generate cash float. So GEICO

and other companies, they charge the premium up-front, so you pay the 12-

month premium up-front and generally there’s 12 years before a client will

make a claim. So let’s say someone pays $1,000 a year over 12 years,

Buffett and Munger essentially have $12,000 of cash which they can invest,

and so they call that cash float. The reason they love insurance so much is

it produces huge amounts of cash that Buffett and Munger can take away and

invest in companies that need start-up money and money to get to scale and

get into profitability.

I was reading this and all of this clicked that my consulting business was

generating quite a bit of cash and I sort of thought of that as my GEICO,

my cash float business. So I started shifting the revenues from my

consulting business into SnapInspect to help it scale more rapidly. I could

get very detailed here, even into the tax things — but if you have a group

structure, you can shift revenue from one company to another company and

expense it in another company and it’s expensed against the revenue in the

other and it’s amazing how powerful it is.

You can essentially take money out of your service business, invest it in

your product business, and get a 10 times ROI on it. So let’s say you make

$10,000 in your service business. Shift it into your product business,

invest it wisely, get a 10 times ROI: that’s $100,000. That’s essentially

what Warren Buffett and Munger did and that’s why they’re so successful. I

use that same strategy today to scale SnapInspect, so shifting revenues

from my marketing consulting business into SnapInspect to help it scale.

Trent: Thank you for sharing that because I think that that type of

thinking is not commonly talked about, especially in the “Internet

marketing communities”. People there are all talking about getting rich

quick and a fast buck and all that stuff that is more or less a load of

crap.

Sam: Well, I found the perfect mix is to mix Internet marketing, like all

of this IM stuff, in with the big thinking that the big guys have and sort

of see ways that you could do what they’ve done in the traditional old days

and into today’s thing because Internet marketing, it’s very tactical. It

really lacks any form of where are we going with this. You know what I

mean? Like what’s the 10-year strategy? That doesn’t exist in the IM world;

it’s about making a buck today.

Trent: I couldn’t agree more. I have a course called the “Best Buyer

Formula” and right at the very top of the sales page, it says, “What would

you rather build: a business that’s going to make you a couple of quick

bucks or something that’s going to be around for years that you can one day

sell to somebody else for a big pile of cash?”

Sam: Yeah, well, I mean, yeah. I was broke for a long time and I lived at

home with my parents up until 12 months ago and my office was in my garage

and all I’d dreamed about was making that quick buck, because it would be

very nice to go to a restaurant and actually have a car that maybe had

leather seats, after being poor for so long. I mean, I can definitely see —

but as soon as you make that quick buck, like as soon as I was able to buy

a nice car and stuff, it gets old so fast that you immediately realize that

this is a long-term thing and you’re looking to build something. The quick

buck isn’t attractive any more.

Trent: That’s so true. I used a subject line once — and this got one of

the highest open rates that I’ve ever had — is “How to Build a Business

You Can Be Proud Of.” That’s the problem, I think, with a lot of the quick-

buck businesses, is that it’s not something you necessarily would want to

hang your reputation on and tell your family all about even though it’s

putting some money in the short-term in your bank account.

Sam: Yeah, I honestly think if you can’t tell your friends and family about

your business without cringing, then you’re never going to do well in it

ever.

Trent: I agree. All right, so let’s talk a little bit then about — I want

to talk about how you found — because I think this is a huge hang-up for

people, as well, and this applies to both people who are listening to this

who are thinking about starting any type of service business, as well as it

does to people who would be interested in potentially starting any kind of

product business and that’s how do you get the idea?

I want to give a shout-out to Dane Maxwell because I’m pretty sure that you

learned from him, he calls it “idea extraction.” Do you want to talk about

that?

Sam: Yeah, this is big. This is actually how I took Dane’s thinking and

applied it to, basically, consulting to even find the market and what to

sell. This is a really powerful thing which Dane, I’d never heard anybody

else mention it before Dane. It’s called “idea extraction” and it’s

essentially picking a market, a decent market — so, I mean, most

entrepreneurs go out and they just target everyone. That’s failure number

one. You have to pick something specific and you have to make sure those

people have money to spend and it’s a decent market where money can be

made.

So step one is pick a market, step two is talk to the market and find out

what their most painful problems are. Instead of coming up with an idea of

what you believe might help them or what you believe might be “cool,” I

mean, you don’t assume anything; you talk to them and you talk to them

about what the most painful part of working in that particular market is

and once you’ve found an extremely painful problem, you essentially build,

you come up with an idea to solve that problem.

I picked the market property managers and I started e-mailing and calling

property managers and asking them what the most painful part about their

job was and they said “property inspections.”

Trent: Sorry to interrupt you, but why did you pick property managers?

Sam: A lot of people ask me that and I wish I had a cool answer but it

literally was just in my mind. I mean, I had been at a dinner two nights

before, a family dinner, where there was a guy that owned a property

management business there and I was asking him questions about it and it

was doing really well. I mean, he had an Aston Martin so I figured this

dude was the man.

When I thought about, “What’s a profitable business to target?”, well, I

thought, ‘”This guy has an Aston Martin, he’s in property management, it’s

going good. This must be a good market.”

Trent: Okay.

Sam: I wish I could give you some sort of science to it but that was how I

came up with it.

Trent: But the thing I want people to understand is you didn’t get lucky

because some dude showed up in an Aston Martin. Because property

management, if you don’t go and do what you’re about to explain in a

second, you still didn’t or would not have come up with the idea for

SnapInspect, so what happened next after you saw an Aston Martin and

thought, “Okay, property management must be at least profitable?”

Sam: Sure. I did some other things to figure out whether it was a good

market to target because my old mindset was very doubtful, like I didn’t

just start looking into property — I mean, this thought was lingering for

two weeks and so I was looking at job websites and seeing what industries

were posting the most jobs available because I figured if people are

hiring, then industry must be good and I was Googling things like “what

industries are going well” and all sorts of things.

But property management still seemed to be good, I hadn’t ruled it out, so

I decided, “Oh, I’m going to look into this. This is my market to start

with,” and I basically jumped into Google and started searching for

property management businesses and started building a list of them in

Microsoft Excel, just going to their “About Us” page, copy-pasting the

company name, copy-pasting a couple of contacts from the business into

Excel and I built a list of 100 people and then I sent out one e-mail,

blasted it to all 100, subject line was “Strange Question” and I go, “Hi,

my name’s Sam Ovens. I’m currently doing some research on the property

management industry and the most painful problems in it.” Then my question

was, “On a day-to-day basis, what is the most painful task-related problem

you face as a property manager? I’d love to hear your answer, even if it’s

just one sentence. Thanks, Sam.”

I blasted that out to 100 people, got maybe 20 responses with people giving

me a couple of different answers. Then I e-mailed back those 20 people and

I said, “You sound like you know your stuff in this industry. Would you

mind jumping on the phone with me for just 5, 10 minutes so I can ask you a

couple more questions?” I think about 10 people said yes, and so I called

them up and we had deeper conversations. I think it was my third phone call

where someone told me property inspections were their most painful problem

and that’s where it all started.

Trent: I hope that the audience is understanding the gravity of what you’re

explaining and I’m going to repeat it because I think it’s so incredibly

important. You sent 100 e-mails to people who did not know you from Adam —

anybody can do that. You didn’t try to sell them anything in the e-mail;

you just asked them a question. Then you got 10 conversations out of that

and then you got an idea out of that.

Sam: Yep.

Trent: So that is the big golden nugget, folks. I mean, there’s been many

golden nuggets in this interview, but that has got to be one of the top two

or three.

Sam: Oh, if there’s a way to start, I mean, I might have got a bit too

advanced with the whole “cash float” concept and stuff, but this was the

major breakthrough, I think, for me, in the beginning, was you didn’t have

to come up with ideas in the shower or be a creative genius. You could just

find problems and build solutions to them. I think even Mark Cuban said

recently, “Innovation is dead. You just solve problems.” I’m pretty sure he

said something exactly along the lines of that, like you don’t need to be a

creative genius; if there’s a painful problem that someone has, you have a

solution to it, they’re going to buy it.

In business, people don’t buy things that are “cool,” people buy things

that solve problems and the more pain associated to a problem, the easier

it is to sell a solution to it and that’s true. I applied that same

thinking of idea extraction into my consulting business, so step one, which

is a pick a market, pick a profitable market, I picked a profitable market,

which was high-ticket B2B companies.

Then the next step was, “Well, find out what their most painful problem

is.” I started talking to a lot of these people and they just wanted more

customers, more leads. They wanted more in the pipeline and I figured,

“Well, instead of building a software product to solve that, I could just

provide this service.” So it’s not just for SaaS, and it’s most certainly

not just for SaaS and it’s most certain not just for products. That line of

thinking can be used to sell anything in the world.

Trent: By the way, folks, if you don’t know what SaaS is, it’s “software as

a service,” software that’s hosted on the web that people pay a monthly fee

to use.

Sam: Mm-hmm.

Trent: Sorry, I didn’t mean to cut you off. I just wanted to make sure that

people didn’t get confused by that terminology.

Sam: Yeah, no, that’s no problem. So, I mean, yeah, I used that same line

of thinking to come up with my service business and I still use that same

line of thinking today. I’ve got some other businesses and investments that

I’ve got going on on the side now, too, because of that cash float. Once I

understood that concept, I wanted to put it in more places and I’ve still

used that same line of thinking to pick good markets, find painful

problems, and provide solutions to them.

Trent: Let’s talk about mistakes, because I want people to understand that

you’re not like this thousand-IQ rocket scientist and, “Hey, I can’t do

what Sam did. He’s way smarter than me, blah, blah, blah,” because that’s

just a limiting belief that inexperienced entrepreneurs let get in the way

or some of them do, let get in their way. I’m willing to bet that, just

like me, you made a truckload of mistakes along your way.

Sam: Oh, man, there’s a lot. See, that’s the danger of people listening to

me now. They might think, “I can’t do that. I can’t do this. He sounds like

he knows so much.” Well, geez, you should have heard me a year ago.

Honestly, a year ago, I didn’t even know what a lead was. I didn’t know

what SaaS meant. I actually Googled SaaS. I didn’t know about headlines, I

didn’t know about copy writing. I honestly knew nothing. I didn’t know

anything about software, I still know nothing about software. I mean, I

didn’t know anything, literally.

My other businesses were like a daily deal website that failed and a job

board website that failed. I mean, they were just the sort of businesses

that people start because they see a couple of other ones that are doing

well. There was no good thinking or logic behind starting those businesses.

Trent: No idea extraction.

Sam: Yeah, and so all of this, big mistakes I made, biggest mistake in the

world I made was starting a business before talking to the customers. For

example, I started my first business, which was a job board website, I

started it, I didn’t talk to a single person because I thought they’d steal

my idea. Even when I talked to people about it, like talked to my developer

at the time, I’d close the windows. I thought I was sitting on some sort of

Facebook version two thing, and that was bad because it never got any

oxygen and I never talked to a customer about it. I mean, it took me a year

to build. I spent $10,000 of my own money on it, which I had to sell my car

to get that, plus all of my income at the time and then we launched it and

there was just crickets. No one joined, so I thought, “Oh, hell, I’m going

to have to do the unthinkable and talk to some customers.”

So I started talking to some customers and they’re like, “What is this? I

don’t need this,’ and I thought there was something wrong with them but,

no, everyone just said that. So the business just died because no one

needed it. It didn’t solve any problem, it was just some cool thing and

cool things don’t sell. Well, that’s not true. I mean, I guess you could

say an iPhone’s cool but I guess an iPhone solves a lot of painful problems

that people used to have. But if something’s just got some little “cool”

factor to it and you’ve invented it just out of your own head without

solving any problem or talking to a customer, it’s going to fail.

Trent: Unless it’s a game or something like that.

Sam: Yeah, I mean, there’s always exceptions to the rule but talking about

the bulk, I mean, yeah.

Trent: Mm-hmm.

Sam: What’s another big mistake? I guess building something without first

trying to sell it. So, my second business solved a problem and people

thought it was good. I talked to the market, they said this was a problem,

they thought this was a good solution. They said they’d use it but I never

tested whether they’d actually pay for it and you’d be amazed at how many

people, even the customers in a market, will tell you that they’ll use

something and that something’s awesome and, yeah, they’ll pay money for it,

they’ll even say they’ll pay money for it, but when you actually get them

to pay money for it, it’s a very different story.

It’s like playing poker with no real money. I mean, I’m sure everyone’s

done that and watch the dynamics of the game; no one is sensible. They’re

all-in every hand and they don’t care sometimes. Pretty much, the game

never finishes because everyone just leaves because it’s so boring. But put

real money in, even just $10 a person, and everyone is dead serious and no

one is going to do any moves that aren’t sensible.

It’s the same in business. As soon as you bring money up and try to sell

it, people start squirming in their seats and you get the real

conversation. So talking about money and trying to sell something before

building it is huge because what I always thought is think about what’s

going to happen once I’ve built this product. So with SnapInspect, I

thought, “Once I build the product, I’m going to have to sell it to people

and then when I talk about money, they might not want to buy it,” so I

figured, “Why don’t I have that conversation now before building the

product?”

That was huge. I got to see the real responses and the real squirms and

objections and things of the market before building it and that would be my

second major thing, I’d say.

Trent: And those are two pretty common mistakes, absolutely.

Sam: Yup, for sure.

Trent: All right, we are coming up on an hour here and I generally like to

keep my episodes to about that length of time. So unless there’s something

else that you think that we should talk about, I think we produced a really

fantastic interview here, Sam. I want to thank you for that. So before we

sign off, again, is there anything else that you wanted to talk about?

Sam: No, I think I’ve covered pretty much my whole story from when I got

started in business.

Trent: Okay, so if anyone wants to get in touch with you, I’m assuming they

can just go to samovens.com because I can see your e-mail address right on

it, so I will link to that website from the podcast or rather the post on

brightideas.co and at the end of the interview — I don’t know what the

shortcode is — but I’ll give the exact path to get to this interview.

Sam: Yeah, samovens.com is my website and sam@samovens.com is my e-mail and

if the e-mails are short and they actually have a specific question in

them, I typically reply to them.

Trent: Okay, terrific. Well, Sam, it has been absolutely wonderful to speak

with you, to have you on the show. I just want to give you a huge round of

applause for going out and Googling “entrepreneurship” and then becoming a

very successful one. I think that your family is undoubtedly exceedingly

proud and you should be, too, and I think it’s just fantastic what you’ve

accomplished and thanks for sharing your story.

Sam: No problem.

Trent: All right, and you can come back on the show any time you like. As a

matter of fact, I may reach out to you as I may want to do another

interview more devoted to your SaaS app because I’m sure there’s another

whole other hour or so of conversation that we could have around that, but

for now I think we’ve got it covered.

All right, to get to the show notes from today’s episode including the

transcript, head over to brightideas.co/69. Now, if you’ve really enjoyed

this episode, I need to ask you for the smallest favor ever: just head over

to brightideas.co/love where you will find a link to leave us a rating in

the iTunes Store. I can’t stress how important it is and how much I

appreciate it every time a listener takes that moment to fire up iTunes and

go and leave us a five-star feedback and some comment because it helps the

show to get more exposure and the more exposure we get, the more folks like

you that we can help to massively boost your business.

So thank you very much. That’s it for this episode. I’m your host, Trent

Dyrsmid, and I look forward to producing the next one for you. Take care

and have a wonderful day.

Announcer: Thanks very much for listening to the Bright Ideas podcast.

Check us out on the web at brightideas.co.

About Sam Ovens

sam-ovens-interviewSam Ovens is an Entrepreneur, Marketing Consultant and the founder of SnapInspect – a property inspection app for property management companies.

Sam started as a marketing consultant and used the money from his consulting business as “Cash Float” to start and scale his main business SnapInspect.

Digital Marketing Strategy: How to Grow a Remarkable Agency Using Proven Small Business Marketing Tactics with Mike Michalowicz

Each year Americans start one million new businesses, nearly 80 percent of which fail within the first five years. Under such pressure to stay alive—let alone grow—it’s easy for entrepreneurs to get caught up in a never-ending cycle of “sell it—do it, sell it—do it” that leaves them exhausted, frustrated, and unable to get ahead no matter how hard they try.

This is the exact situation Mike Michalowicz found himself in when he was trying to grow his first company. Although the business was making steady money, there was never very much left over and he was chasing customers left and right, putting in twenty-eight-hour days, eight days a week. The punishing grind never let up. His company was alive but stunted, and he was barely breathing. That’s when he discovered an unlikely source of inspiration—pumpkin farmers.

After reading an article about a local farmer who had dedicated his life to growing giant pump­kins, Michalowicz realized the same process could apply to growing a business. He tested the Pumpkin Plan on his own company and transformed it into a remarkable, multimillion-dollar industry leader. First he did it for himself. Then for others. And now you. So what is the Pumpkin Plan?

Listen to the Audio

Digital Marketing Strategy: How the La Costa Resort Increased Revenue from Social Media by 65%

Do you know exactly which pieces of content are producing the most revenue for you?

If you did, you do think that would help you to better understand the needs and wants of your audience?

Of course it would. As a matter of fact, getting that kind of insight would be hugely valuable because it would allow you to create even more of the types of content that are driving the most revenue in your business.

How to Tie Revenue Back to Content

Using Analytics tracking links and custom campaigns is incredibly valuable when it comes to giving you insight into which pieces of content are producing the most revenue and new subscribers. To see a specific example of how to do this, have a look at this post.

When you listen to this fascinating and informative interview, you are going to hear Katy and I talk about:

  • (03:54) How La Costa Increased revenue by 65% via Social Media
  • (7:00) How Katy uses Google Analytics to track revenue and tie it directly to content
  • (14:20) How Katy is split testing Facebook ads
  • (21:20) How Katy’s team increased revenue from email marketing by 54%
  • (24:00) How Katy segments her mailing list
  • (25:00) How Katy is managing her editorial calendar
  • (28:00) How Katy is using re-targeting to increase revenue
  • (32:00) How Katy is using Twitter chats to increase engagement

Links

Additional Resources Mentioned

Below is a screenshot of La Costa Resorts custom campaign tracking.

GA_Campaign_RevTracking

Below is a screenshot of Katy’s  editorial calendar for email.

email_calendar

Below is the screenshot of how we use Google calendar to manage our editorial calendar. Green items are done. Red items are “to do” and yellow (not shown in this screenshot) signify “in progress”. Oh..and blue signifies Liz and I’s wedding :)

GoogleEdCalendar

More About This Episode

The Bright Ideas podcast is the podcast for business owners and marketers who want to discover how to use online marketing and sales automation tactics to massively grow their business.

It’s designed to help marketing agencies and small business owners discover which online marketing strategies are working most effectively today – all from the mouths of expert entrepreneurs who are already making it big.

Listen Now

Leave some feedback:

Connect with Trent Dyrsmid:

About Katy Harrison

katyharrison_headshot

Katy Harrison is the Online Marketing Manager at La Costa Resort and Spa in Carlsbad, CA. She manages the luxury resort’s website, email campaign, social media and online presence. Originally from South Shore, MA, Katy moved to San Diego for the year-round beach weather in 2007. Prior to her role at La Costa Resort, Katy honed her PR and social media skills working at a reputable downtown San Diego PR and advertising agency with clients including The San Diego Museum of Art, Del Mar Racetrack, NTN Buzztime and BillMyParents.

Follow Katy on Twitter: @OmniLaCosta

Digital Marketing Strategy: How Mike Worley Generated $55,000 in His First 90 Days As a Marketing Agency Owner

Special Update: Since this interview was originally recorded, Mike Worley went on to generate $55,000 in his first 90 days in business! If you’d like to get direct access to Mike, join the Bright Ideas Mastermind Elite (he’s a member).

Special Update: Since this interview was originally recorded, Mike Worley went on to generate $55,000 in his first 90 days in business! If you’d like to get direct access to Mike, join the Bright Ideas Mastermind Elite (he’s a member).

Mike Worley is probably the most loyal listener I’ve ever met. He’s listened to every single episode of the BrightIdeas podcast!

Here’s a snippet from an email he sent to me…

First of all just got to thank you for all the value that you have provided through Bright Ideas. For the past 3 yrs I have had 2 hrs of driving a day as I was leading the marketing efforts for a Publishing company in Colorado. I have listened to every single podcast that you have done and can’t thank you enough as it has helped me to take the entrepreneurial leap in starting my own marketing agency in the last month.

With your help and a few other influential podcaster’s I’m launching the agency (Clymb Marketing: http://www.clymbmarketing.com/) with 5 retainer clients July 1st and will potentially double my salary in the first six months. I have also launched a non-profit that is teaching 100 teenagers in Colorado how to start there own sustainable business’ as well http://teenstartupchallenge.com/ ….I’m still boot strapping but would be way behind the curve if it wasn’t for the incredible content that you have created so thank you!!

When I saw how much success he was having I immediately asked him to come onto the show and explain how he’s accomplished what he has.

More About This Episode

The Bright Ideas podcast is the podcast for business owners and marketers who want to discover how to use online marketing and sales automation tactics to massively grow their business.

It’s designed to help marketing agencies and small business owners discover which online marketing strategies are working most effectively today – all from the mouths of expert entrepreneurs who are already making it big.

Listen Now

Leave some feedback:

Connect with Trent Dyrsmid:

Transcript

Trent: Hey there, bright idea hunters. Welcome to the Bright Ideas

podcast. I’m your host, Trent Dyrsmid, and this is the podcast

for marketing agencies and entrepreneurs who want to discover

how to use content marketing and marketing automation to

massively boost their business.On the show with me today is a guy by the name of Mike Worley.

Mike has been listening to Bright Ideas as a matter of fact

since day one. He’s listened to every single episode. I got an

email from him today, and he was explaining to me how he just

put in this notice with his job. He’s started an agency, and

he’s already got five clients on retainer, which absolutely blew

my mind.He had a whole bunch of questions for me, so I said to him,

“Let’s do the Q&A as a podcast episode, because I’m sure there

are some other people out there who would love to quit their

jobs and would love to know exactly what it was that you learned

and how you got through this whole process and how you started

an agency with a brand new baby, no less.” This is really going

to be a fantastic episode.Before we get to that, I want to tell you about a product I

recently launched, which was a huge success, called the MobiLead

Method. You can get to it at the TheMobiLeadMethod.com. This was

a product where I’m teaching people who want to start a

marketing agency on how to find and attract customers.Please join me in welcoming Mike to the show. Hey, Mike. Welcome

to the show.Mike: Thanks, Trent. Honored to be here.Trent: You wrote me a very interesting email that I have to say really

kind of choked me up and I want to thank you for that. For the

folks that didn’t have the privilege of reading that email, I’m

just going to let you, more or less, summarize what you wrote to

  1. That’s why this interview is taking place.Mike: Yeah, not a problem. For the last three years, I have been

driving anywhere from two to three hours a day working for a

publishing company as a marketer, and have been doing content

marketing, social media coaching for authors, and big book

projects, and such. During that commute, I have taken it to try

and create my own MBA process. Part of that was listening to

every single Bright Ideas podcast and just soaking in everything

I can.I have listened to a bunch of different podcasts, but, Trent,

your podcasts, and I can say this without reserve, was one of

the ones that allowed key interviews to allow me to implement on

the spot what was going on. I’ve only hit the tip of the iceberg

just getting more into life cycle marketing right now, even. It

allowed me as a marketer to take it to a whole new level. Within

the last month, I have had a baby girl, was able to put my two

weeks in, and have five retainer clients working that are going

to become finalized in the next two weeks.

Trent: Wow. You gave yourself your on-the-road MBA, and then took

action, quit your job, started your own marketing agency, and

you’ve got five retainer clients that are going to be on board

by July 1st. You wrote me and said you’ll potentially double

your salary within the first six months. That’s phenomenal.

Mike: Yeah, it’s huge. It’s allowing my wife to quit her job. Her

dream has always been to be a stay-at-home mom. It’s allowed for

that to happen, and for us to create a lifestyle that we’ve

always dreamed of, and that I’ve heard other marketers be

interviewed on your podcast and everything. It’s not Golden

Gate, but we’re leveraging this in a way that the risk is very

mitigated. It’s been very calculated.

Trent: Yeah. Wow, especially with the new baby. That’s pretty

important. Again, I want to thank you for reaching out and

sending that email, because that made my week. When I hear stuff

like that it’s pretty cool.

Rather than turning this into the Bright Ideas is Awesome Show,

what I would rather do is talk about how you got to that mental

place, first of all. You said it was a very calculated decision

process and you really wanted to mitigate risk. I want to

understand the details of that. Then I also want to understand

how you got these five clients and that whole process.

Let’s first of all talk about, here you are, you’ve got a wife

who’s obviously been pregnant for a while, because that doesn’t

happen in just two weeks. You’re saying, “Hey, honey, I think I

want to quit my job.” How’d that conversation go?

Mike: Well, I am, at my core, an entrepreneur. I started my first

business as selling pogs on the playground when I was in fifth

grade, and getting in the principal’s office because I had a wad

of ones and looked like a drug dealer on the playground. It’s

always been in my blood, so my wife knew what she was getting

into when she married me five years ago.

Really, some of it is a mutual decision that both my wife and I

came to. Some of that was just in what her dream and her calling

in wanting to stay home. I knew for a fact, just crunching the

numbers, that I was not making near enough at this publishing

company to allow that to happen.

I have had the unique blessing of having some of the best

business mentors since I was 14 years old, and I was able to

reach out to them and tell them some general ideas I was having.

Over the next coming months they helped me really cultivate that

into something that could be sustainable. That was kind of the

beginning stages of it all.

Trent: Give me a little bit more detail on that. These mentors,

describe what kind of advice they were giving you here. You’re

this guy, you’ve got a job, did you know, first of all, what

kind of business you wanted to start?

Mike: Yeah. One of the things I’ve always taught but I’ve learned is,

I call it your KIT. It’s your knowledge, your interests, and

your talents. I really went into self-assessment mode. My wife

and I took two weeks in last September and spent it in Hawaii,

and I really took that time to just assess what it is that I’m

knowledgeable in, what I’m truly interested in, and what I’m

talented enough in to actually get paid for it.

I had been working with authors, working on different web-based

projects and such, and had some real affirmation from some very

significant business mentors. One of the guys that has been

mentoring me is a guy named John Dale. John is a really unique

content marketer. He is one of the few that was selected into

Seth Godin’s SAMBA program, and was able to study under Seth

Godin for a while. He has consulted with Martha Stewart and

Coors, and these very large companies. It was even through him

and him giving me some homework to do in assessing what this

business model would be. His affirmation in saying, “You’ve got

what it takes. Let’s walk through some of this together.” He’s

been a huge encouragement in that way.

That’s just one example in assessing that, but also seeing the

need and the problem that I could solve for leaders,

entrepreneurs, small business owners not understanding the power

of online marketing and social media and being able to leverage

some automation in there to build their business.

Trent: This resulted in your company ClymbMarketing.com. When you

started this, did you go ahead and decide… Well the way I

teach my tribe is I say the first thing you need to do is pick a

niche. For example, my fiancee, who will be my wife by the time

this episode is recorded, Liz, she is also starting a marketing

agency, and I haven’t really talked anything about this because

we literally only decided a couple of days ago as a result of my

MobiLead Method launch.

Mike: Very cool.

Trent: We’re going to focus exclusively on dentists. I’m not going to

side track this interview on why, but the bottom line is because

it’s a wealthy niche. They have high customer value, and we can

charge premium prices because it’s worth it to them. Did you do

that with your agency?

Mike: That’s a great question, and something that I am currently

struggling with but trying to get over. For example, the five

clients that I have on retainer starting on July 1st go anywhere

from financial advisor, whose dream has been to self-publish his

book and build an online community around it. He’s a professor

at Daniels University. From him, to one of the largest non-

profits in the U.S., to a real estate tycoon here in Denver who

has a marketing software idea that he wants to bring from idea

into implementation.

I need to find what that niche is, I believe. I’m kind of

struggling through that to find what that is. From the get go,

no, I haven’t have the real estate niche or dentist or something

in that way. I don’t necessarily recommend that. It’s just that

over the last couple of years I’ve been able to be really

intentional about building a network that varies businesses and

services.

What was truly amazing was when I took that leap to say, “I’m

going out on my own,” watching the people that responded.

Because of the way I’ve built that relational network, people

came out of the woodwork that I didn’t even think would want to

be a client.

Trent: That speaks volumes, obviously, about how you’ve conducted

yourself. For anyone listening, when I talk about the importance

of picking a niche, that doesn’t mean you turn away business

that comes knocking on your door, especially if that business is

as a result of your personal relationships. They don’t care

what’s on your website. They’re like, “Hey, Mike’s a smart guy.

I’m going to go deal with Mike.” Whether your website says you

focus on dentists or construction people, they probably wouldn’t

care. Eventually, your list of personal contacts runs dry.

Mike: Exactly. That’s what has allowed me to launch this agency, but

for sustainable reasons I really need to land in an area. I

promise I won’t do dentists.

Trent: Actually, I would encourage that you do dentists.

Mike: I’ll definitely do some research into it.

Trent: Did you buy the MobiLead Method, by the way?

Mike: No, I didn’t actually. I’ve probably read and been everywhere

on your website but did not grab that.

Trent: For the folks who don’t know what that is, it’s a product that

I just launched. If you could do TheMobiLeadMethod.com, you can

get it. It’s a product that I launched to teach people how to

generate leads for selling marketing services to small

businesses. It’s the exact formula that Liz is going to be

following when she’s building her agency. In the beginning of

that, I talk a lot about the importance of picking a niche.

That’s why I’m going down this road with this line of questions.

Mike: That’s definitely something I want to grab.

Trent: I had another reason why I asked you that, and it escaped me in

the middle of that explanation, so apologies to you and the

audience for that. Hopefully it will come to me.

You are now an entrepreneur. You’ve got this jump start, as it

were, on your business, and it sounds like you’ve already

identified that you need…

Oh, there’s the idea. Now I remember why. Going back. You said

you weren’t going to do dentists. We’re actually going to be

having a mastermind, details to come, to teach other people that

they should go after dentists. There are 167,000 dentists in the

United States. Most of them do quite well financially, and are

not very good marketers. This whole dental thing came as a

result of an orthodontist that I had on my show recently, a guy

by the name of Dr. Dustin Burleson.

Mike: That was a great interview, by the way. I was going to wonder

if it came out of that conversation, because that was an

extremely eye-opening interview.

Trent: Yeah, a lot has come out of that, and if you want to get to

that interview if you’re listening to this go to

BrightIdeas.co/56 and it will take you to that interview. Dustin

has been unbelievably successful as an orthodontist because he

embraced marketing automation to the nth degree.

The guy that does all of his marketing for him, I am partnering

up with, and we’re going to be basically having access to all of

the proven collateral and all the campaigns and everything.

That’s why the dentist niche. People think, “Well how can you

sell marketing services to dentists if you’ve never been a

dentist?” You don’t need to have been a dentist. You just need

to align yourself with someone who has that domain expertise.

To you and everyone listening, just because I’m going into

dentists doesn’t mean there’s not enough room for everybody. If

you want to get access to what I’m explaining and you’re on my

mailing list, there will be further announcements to come.

Mike: That’s cool.

Trent: Have you got to the point yet… I see you have your website

  1. I don’t see any way that you’re capturing leads on it, so

you should fix that.

Mike: Literally, it’s one of those things that Seth Godin always

talks about. There comes a point where you need to ship and to

make the jump. My web designer that I have designing my website

and such has been about 45 days late on the initial design.

That’s literally a WordPress template that I posted up and did

some design with very rudimentally and was able to put it up.

Trent: I agree with you. Version 1 is better than Version None. It’s

not an ugly site. At least it’s there.

Mike: Yeah, there’s something there. It allows a reference point, but

in the next 30 days I’ll have my new website up.

Trent: You’ve listened to all of my Infusionsoft interviews, because

you’ve listened to every episode, so I can’t help but ask you

when are you getting Infusionsoft?

Mike: That’s one of the reasons why I even emailed you and mentioned

it in there. Earlier today, I was on the phone with Infusionsoft

trying to just talk with them and everything about how robust

the software really is. It will be happening this week. I just

have to get the cash in the bank to make that initial

investment. It’s a long-term strategy that I have to do.

Trent: I know you wanted to ask me a number of questions about that,

because that was the basis of the email, and that’s kind of why

I wanted to turn this conversation into a recorded podcast. I

thought there are a lot of people who would benefit from hearing

the conversation that is about to happen or is already

happening. Any questions you want to ask me? Pretend like we’re

not recording this, and knock yourself out.

Mike: The big argument is Infusionsoft vs. HubSpot, and those are the

two big marketing automation players that I see. I think one of

your best interviews was with a guy named Marcus Sheridan, The

Sales Lion. He’s been influential, for me, in understanding

HubSpot, and using it for certain different projects. Really

understanding the tangible differences between HubSpot and

Infusion, what would make you sway either to the left or the

right?

Trent: I think it’s a profound difference. Think about your website as

this imaginary little wall. On the front side of that wall,

meaning out there in the world, are all the people whose email

address you don’t have yet. On the inside of the wall, are all

the people who have given you their email address.

I think HubSpot does a pretty decent job outside the wall.

They’ve got a lot of nice tools. However, you have to put your

blog on their content management system. I’m not a fan of that,

because that makes moving your content really hard to do. I’m

probably not the most informed HubSpot person in the world, and

maybe they have some really great answer to overcome that

objection, and I’ll leave that to their sales department to do,

but I want my content on my WordPress blog, end stop.

Now, behind the wall, once I collect that email address, that is

where Infusionsoft is, in my opinion, magical. Number one is the

visual campaign builder. I have a bunch of videos with more to

come on my YouTube channel. If you just come to BrightIdeas.co,

there will be a link right up on the navigation bar that will

take you. Infusionsoft success stories is what it is. If you

just watch a few of those videos, you’ll realize how incredibly

simple the visual campaign builder makes it to build campaigns.

I want to talk about this word campaign, because to some people

it might be a bit ambiguous. A campaign can be used not only for

customer acquisition… All a campaign is, is a sequence of

steps. Some of those steps are emails, some of them are phone

calls, some of them might be a fulfillment of a physical

something or other, a letter or a package. Some of them might be

communication like GoToWebinar, for example. It could be any

number of steps. With Infusionsoft, you can automate, in the

campaign builder, all of those steps. It’s like negating the

need for employees, in many cases.

In my particular situation, I have lots of different campaigns

that do lots of different things. Each one of my various

products has a campaign, my overall mailing list has a campaign,

when people are scheduling an interview with me on the show,

there’s a campaign. There’s all this stuff, these sequences of

steps, that have to happen over and over again.

The visual campaign builder, notice I’m saying the word visual,

HubSpot does not have this drag and drop interface that allows

you to literally take these objects which represent an email or

a task or an http post or a fulfillment to send out cards, or an

order form or whatever, They don’t have this visual interface,

so it’s not nearly as intuitive. That is probably the single

biggest reason why I am such an incredible Infusionsoft fan and

why it works so very well for many people.

Then, there are also all these super ninja tricks you can do. I

use a third party software as a service application called

PlusThis that ties into Infusionsoft. There’s no coding

necessary. You don’t need to be an API guy, nothing. It’s just a

web interface.

For example, I talk in previous episodes and in my tutorials

about how important list segmentation is. I get all these people

coming on my lists. I’ve got this YouTube video that gets

watched 2,500 times a day, I get 20, 30 leads a day from that.

Those people, they’re really different from someone who maybe

owns a marketing agency and is coming to me. You just need to

segment your lists. It’s so incredibly important. If you don’t,

you’re sending the same message to everybody and that’s going to

decrease your open rate, and also increase your unsubscribes

because your content is not highly relevant.

Mike: Just curious, how many segments do you have for Bright Ideas?

Trent: Four main ones. Actually, as we record this, I’m literally

about to roll out a major upgrade to my own back end campaign

because I recently learned about PlusThis. I’m going to launch

this new lead magnet called the Conversion Tactics Toolbox. It’s

going to replace the Massive Traffic Toolbox. I’m honestly

better at conversion than I am at traffic. I get a really high

conversion rate off Bright Ideas.

I’ve got this four part video series, so everybody will go

through that four part video series. Then, there’s kind of what

I call my warm-up sequence after that, which is where I share

some more personal information about me, and I highlight a few

of the key interviews that would have more of a broader

interest.

During the opt-in process, when someone first puts in their name

and email and they hit the submit button, it actually takes them

to a separate form, and it says to tell more about you, and it

asks them to pick one of those four segments in a little drop

down list, and it asks them for their last name and mobile

number. If they want to give me that stuff they can, and if they

don’t want to they don’t have to.

Then, what I’m able to do, when they fill out that second form,

depending on which of the four choices in the dropdown box they

choose, I can send them to any one of the four different thank-

you pages. Those thank-you pages are then highly relevant to the

segment that the people have just placed themselves into. I can

make special offers.

One of the things that I’m going to test is big discounts on

some of my products very early on, because some people are

probably going to want to buy them. Other people may not. I want

to test it and find out. The other thing about segmenting is

that from that moment forward, all the other stuff that people

get will only be very specific to the segment they’re in.

My four segments are marketing agency owners, general small

business owners, solo marketing consultants, and then people who

haven’t even started a business yet. Can you see how diverse

their interests are? It would be so incredibly foolish of me to

send everybody the same stuff.

With Infusionsoft, it’s so easy to do this. Because the campaign

builder is visual, when I go back after the fact, maybe a month

later, I get deep analytics within the campaign. I can literally

roll my mouse over these little objects on the campaign builder.

I can roll my mouse over individual emails that are part of a

sequence that are a part of campaign. I can see the open rate

and the click through rate. I can look at my campaign after the

fact all through this visual map, and see which emails are

performing really well, and which ones aren’t.

Hopefully you’re getting an idea of the campaign builder, but

here’s the other thing. Infusionsoft, and to the best of my

knowledge HubSpot doesn’t do this, also runs my affiliate

program, it’s my online shopping cart, and it’s my customer

relationship management system. I don’t have this spider web of

databases and all these different disparate systems that I have

to connect, painfully. Everything is in one place, and I’ll tell

you that makes my life so much easier.

Mike: The little research that I’ve done, HubSpot integrates with

other CRMs, but the CRMs that they even integrate with, I have

not enjoyed working on in the past anyway. I’m sold.

Trent: Are there any more questions that you think you want to ask or

that you think I should ask you that would make this interview

more important? If not, we’ll chop the interview off, and the

people will have gotten value by listening to this point.

Mike: I think just one thing in being a listener for so long and such

has been that you are a content creator. You’re always creating

and such, so one thing I would like to know is how do you keep

things organized? How do you create your content? Using

Infusionsoft to be able to segment your lists and different

things, how much time do you spend a week on that?

Trent: Not nearly as much as you would think. It’s a good question,

though, so I’ll answer it. Up to this point, we have been doing

three posts a week. That’s an interview on Monday and Friday and

some other kind of post in the middle, which more often than

not, lately, has been a training video, usually five minutes

long or less, to show some type of capability of Infusionsoft.

Why do I do that? A lot of people don’t understand what

Infusionsoft can do, and I’m an Infusionsoft affiliate, so it

does actually generate revenue for me.

To do all that, I do the interviews generally on Monday and

Tuesday, and it only takes me about an hour of my time to do an

interview. The prep time before an interview is not very long,

to be honest with you. It’s pretty easy to do. Post-production

is even easier.

Then, Liz, my fiancee/soon-to-be wife, takes over from there.

She makes sure that the transcripts are ordered and that the

post goes up, and we now do caricatures for our guests and she

orders the caricature. She runs the editorial calendar, she

makes sure the posts are published on the days they’re supposed

to be published and that we notify our guests that the post is

published. That used to take more of my time. I would say, for

me, content creation is, at best, a day a week. At best.

Now, with that said, remember I said I wasn’t the greatest

traffic guy in the world? If you go and look at a friend of

mine’s blog, Dan Norris, Inform.ly, his written content totally

kicks my butt. He puts a lot of time. He’ll sometimes work on a

post for several weeks before he publishes it. I am entirely too

lazy to do that, and I would much rather go with the multi-

author approach, which is one of the things that’s on our

roadmap to do, to try and get people writing for Bright Ideas.

If you’re listening to this, and you have a message, and you’re

a good writer and you want to get it out, please come to Bright

Ideas and apply to be a writer. It’s not nearly as bad as you

think.

A question that you didn’t ask but I’m going to answer because

it’s an important one, it why do we all produce content? Well,

in my case, I do it for list growth. At the end of the day, the

real money is in having a list, right? I don’t give stuff away

just because I’m trying to be the most generous guy in the

world. I give stuff away because I want people to freely be able

to test drive an experience with my brand and me, through these

interviews, but I want their email address and I want to know

lots about them so that I can give them an opportunity to buy

the products that I offer that would be relevant and helpful to

them.

One of the things that I did recently was this product launch of

The MobiLead Method. It was amazing, 1,450 new customers in

seven days. We did $40,000 in revenue so far. My list expanded

by just over 2,000 people in seven days.

What’s the takeaway from that? We’re actually going to decrease

the amount of content we do by one. We’re going to do one

interview and probably one written post per week, because the

feedback that we got… Yours was just one of the amazing

testimonials. Some other people wrote me some raving stuff, and

it’s still coming in. I never got that kind of feedback by

giving all my stuff away for free. Go figure. I had to charge

money. This was a big course. It wasn’t like a blog post by any

stretch of the imagination. I worked on it for a long time. The

results, in terms of list growth, traffic, revenue,

opportunities that came as a result of all that exposure,

eclipsed the results that we got from publishing free content by

like a factor of 20.

Mike: Wow.

Trent: Yeah. Phenomenal. There’s a lot more to it. I’m going to

actually write a blog post that goes into detail on what this

launch was, how I made it happen, blah, blah, blah. Oh, you put

me on hold, Mike.

Mike: I got a call in the middle of that. Sorry about that.

Trent: No worries. I was like, “Hey, he put me on hold.” No one’s ever

put me on hold on the show before.

Mike: I’m on my cell phone, so my bad. It’s all good.

Trent: Anyway, I’ve sort of lost my train of thought now. The summary

to answer your question is, it’s not as much time as you think.

I’m still going to be creating content, but the content that I’m

creating is going to be for my customers, as opposed to all for

free, all for the blog.

Mike: Yeah, totally. Well, you’ve built a community where you can do

that now, I think. You have the time and the attention of many,

so the value that you create is exceptional. To hear those kinds

of stats doesn’t really surprise me.

Trent: Thank you. It’s been a treat, I will say, to be the recipient

of this past week. What a wedding present, of course, as well.

Mike: Congratulations.

Trent: Thank you. To all of my customers and not-yet customers who are

listening to this, a very heartfelt thank you to all for making

this such an enjoyable week of my life. I think is probably, not

probably, this is absolutely been the most enjoyable week I have

ever had since going online several years ago. Again, who’d have

thunk that I would have gotten so much positive feedback by

selling stuff instead of giving stuff away? It’s mind boggling

if you think about it.

Mike: Yeah it is. Well, it’s all about value, though. When you make

genuine value for people, they’re going to respond, and you’ve

done that. You’ve proven that. Again, it’s awesome.

Unsurprising.

Trent: I want to add one more thing, too, for you and the people that

are listening. One of my reasons why I was a little bit

reluctant to go down this product launch road to begin with was

I wasn’t sure what type of customer I was going to get. I did a

webinar, and there were about 500 people on it. I could have

never had a 500-person webinar beforehand, but this was pretty

easy because I got 1,400 new customers. I did a poll at the

beginning of the webinar that said, “Do you have a business

already? Yes or No.” Seventy five percent of the people on that

webinar said they already have a business. That’s my target

audience.

I definitely make stuff for people who are just getting started,

but I also want to make more stuff for people who are already in

business because I know a lot of them aren’t getting the results

they want to get yet, and they have some money to spend.

I was very surprised that that large a percentage of this new

audience of customers was already in business running agencies

or solopreneur marketing consultants. It was pretty darn

exciting.

Mike: Well, that’s the thing. If you didn’t use the right tool, you

wouldn’t have been able to even get that information and such.

What do you use for your webinars?

Trent: For my live ones, I use GoToWebinar. For my pre-recorded

webinars, I use Evergreen Business Systems by Mike Filsaime. I

saw a stat on a tweet. I think it was from Jay Baer, who has

also been on my show just recently. It was whether people

preferred live or recorded webinars. Only 16% of business people

actually preferred a live webinar.

I should explain this because this is another revenue strategy

that’s all on autopilot and people really seem to like hearing

ideas like that. I have this other webinar. It’s called Seven

Secrets to Selling to Small Business. You can get to the sign-up

page if you go to BrightIdeas.co/lcm-webinar.

That opt-in page takes you into my funnel and to a fully

automated webinar. The sole goal of that webinar, aside from

capturing another lead for me, is to educate people, because

every webinar has to educate. If you just go on there and sell,

you just piss people off, and they don’t even want you. It’s to

educate people about the concept of life cycle marketing, it’s a

seven-step process, and most people don’t really know much about

  1. Woven into that, is obviously a soft pitch for Infusionsoft.

That webinar, in the last month, maybe 40 days, has, just in

Infusionsoft commissions, $3,000. We’re not even an Infusionsoft

certified consultant yet, which we’re going to be. Once we are,

that same volume of business would have been $6,000 on

autopilot.

All I have is a VA that reaches out and sends a couple hundred

emails every day to the contact page of my target market of

agencies that more or less gives them an invitation to that

landing page. I pay her, I think, $7 an hour. It takes her about

three hours to do that, so $21 a day is my lead spend. Twenty

one dollars a day is a whole lot less than the roughly $3,000

that that made.

My point is if you have anything like that and you’re not using

an automated webinar system and you don’t have someone doing

some type of email-based outbound marketing to your specifically

selected target market, maybe you’re leaving some serious money

on the table.

Mike: Yeah. I love that. I think that’s from your interview from the

Rocket and Co. man. What was his name?

Trent: Casey Graham of the Rocket Company.

Mike: Casey Graham, yeah. He mentioned his pre-recorded webinars in

the same type of way, and I never even really thought about a

recorded one before then. That’s something I will have to

implement in the future, for sure.

Trent: Take a little bit of time to set up. What I generally do is

I’ll hold a live one or two so I get the feel for exactly what I

want to do. I record both of those live ones and I pick the

better of the two, and I turn that into the right kind of file,

and I upload it to the right place in that webinar software, and

then I set it all up. It’s not really that hard to do. You don’t

have to write any code or anything like that. It’s all through

the interface.

The big trick in the webinar is, first of all, never ever

advertise a recorded webinar as a live one because that’s not

true. Don’t say good morning or good afternoon because you never

know what time of the day people are going to listen to it. I

always just say, “Welcome to the webinar. Happy to have you

here, blah, blah, blah.” That kind of thing.

You should attend my recorded one or somebody’s recorded one

first, so you can sort of get an idea. You want to make it look

as live as possible, but just don’t say it’s live. Don’t say it

is, and don’t say it isn’t. Really, it’s the same message. As

that survey that I quoted earlier said, 84% of the people don’t

care. They just want to watch it on their own time. What do you

say we wrap up?

Mike: Yeah, for sure. I just want to do one thing. I’m launching in

the next couple of weeks with five clients. I’m going to be

implementing Infusionsoft and such. What I’d like to do is, I

have five and I’m hoping to scale this and grow this into a

seven-figure agency. When I do that, I want to come back and

talk with you.

Trent: Absolutely. You don’t even have to wait until you’re at seven

figures. I’d love to have you back, Mike, when you hit a run

rate. When you have your first $40,000 to $50,000 month, let me

know. Heck, even when you have your first $30,000 month.

So many people who are like you were, they’re driving in their

car, they’re going back and forth, and listening to these

things, like, “Gosh, I’d love to,” or “I really should,” but

fear. Even those of us who have already taken the plunge,

sometimes we have crappy days or crappy weeks, or even crappy

months, and we need pick-me-ups. For me, when I listen to the

success of other entrepreneurs, there is no better pick-me-up in

the world than that. Hearing other people having success, doing

stuff that I know I can do, helps immensely. Don’t wait too

long. That’s all I’m saying.

Mike: That’s good.

Trent: All right, man. Well, thank you for making the time to be on

the show with me. We will talk to you soon.

Mike: Not a problem. Thank you, Trent.

Trent: To get to the show notes for today’s episode, go to

BrightIdeas.co/67. If you’re listening to this on your mobile

phone, just text TRENT to 585858, and I’m going to give you

access to some very special stuff. The Conversion Tactics

Toolbox, which is a four-part video series where I go into

detail about how I make Bright Ideas convert as much of the

traffic as I do. We’re far above average, so I hope that you’ll

find that very interesting.

That’s it for this episode. I’m your host, Trent Dyrsmid. Thank

you very much for tuning in and being a listener. It is truly my

privilege to be able to produce these wonderful podcasts for

you. I look forward to seeing you, or having you see or hear me

rather, in the next episode. Take care.

About Mike Worley

mike-worleyMike Worley lives with his beautiful wife Holly in Denver, Colorado. He is a digital marketer and entrepreneur that has helped authors, artists, and business owners sell more by creating communities around their product, service or brand. As a marketer and entrepreneur his drive has been to become an expert in defining and solving problems in the online marketplace.

When not working online, Mike unplugs by playing in the Rocky Mountains. When the first snow hits Summit County, they are skiing, and as soon as the snow melts, they are putting on their hiking boots. They are thrilled to have had their first little girl Ellyana join their family in May of 2013.

Digital Marketing Strategy: How Blue Cow Creative Doubled Revenue in 12 months with Marketing Automation

Do you run a small marketing agency and struggle to attract enough new clients to meet your growth goals?

Would you like to discover a way to put client attraction on autopilot?

In this episode of the Bright Ideas podcast, my guest on the show is Shaun Whynacht, founder of Blue Cow Creative, a small marketing agency based in Nova Scotia, Canada. I learned of Shaun at the last Infusioncon and when I heard that he’d doubled his revenue in just a year, I asked him to come on the show to share his story.

When you listen to this fascinating and informative interview, you are going to hear Shaun and I talk about:

  • (02:13) Who he is and what his company is all about
  • (04:13) The results they’ve achieved (doubling their revenue!)
  • (04:58) What they did prior to what they’re doing now
  • (06:13) A big investment they made, and the cost of signing up
  • (08:13) How they capture leads
  • (10:53) Specific tactics they use for lead magnets
  • (11:53) Their focus on educating prospects
  • (13:13) How they segment their list
  • (15:49) The type of lead magnets they use
  • (18:43) Which social networks are working for them
  • (19:58) How they drive traffic
  • (21:13) A description of their lead nurture process
  • (22:58) How they are using the phone to follow up
  • (25:03) How they are converting prospects
  • (26:43) How they qualify leads
  • (31:13) How they are using testimonials
  • (33:53) How Infusionsoft has exponentially improved their nurturing
  • (38:13) How they are using Infusionsoft for operations
  • (39:46) Lightning round

Links

More About This Episode

The Bright Ideas podcast is the podcast for business owners and marketers who want to discover how to use online marketing and sales automation tactics to massively grow their business.

It’s designed to help marketing agencies and small business owners discover which online marketing strategies are working most effectively today – all from the mouths of expert entrepreneurs who are already making it big.

Listen Now

Leave some feedback:

Connect with Trent Dyrsmid:

Transcript

Trent

Dyrsmid: Hey there, bright idea hunters. Welcome to the ‘Bright Ideas’

podcast. I’m your host, Trent Dyrsmid, and this is the podcast for

marketing agencies and entrepreneurs who want to discover how to use

content marketing and marketing automation to massively boost their

business.On the show with me today is a fellow by the name of Shaun Whynacht,

who is the founder of a company called Blue Cow Creative, a small marketing

agency. I learned of Shaun by way of attending InfusionCon this past year.

Shaun started to use InfusionSoft, and in the year following his using it,

he was able to double the revenue of his firm. Being as he’s got a

relatively small firm, just two people, I wanted to get him on to tell his

story because that’ll be a great story of significant results with someone

who maybe doesn’t have a huge pile of resources to work with Shaun’s story

is exactly that.Before we get to the interview, I want to give you my tool tip for

this episode, and that is something called JobChangeAlerts.com. If you want

to know when someone who you are connected to on LinkedIn changes their job

description or profile, which might be an opportune time for you to get in

touch with them to sell them your services, JobChangeAlerts.com will do

that for you. Will actually send you an email, so it’s a super-cool little

tool and it’s totally free.The other announcement is, my next life cycle marketing webinar,

which you can register for at BrightIdeas.co/webinar. If you are not yet

getting as many leads as you would like, or you’re not doing a good enough

job converting those leads to customers, or you’re not getting enough

referrals from your existing customers, this webinar will definitely help

you to improve your results. So, BrightIdeas.co/webinar, to register.So, with that said, please join me in welcoming Shaun to the show.

Hey, Shaun, welcome to the show.Shaun

Whynacht: Thanks for having me.Trent: It’s a pleasure to have you on. I think you’re the first

Canadian that I’ve actually had on my show, which is significant for those

in the audience who don’t know, because I’m Canadian.Shaun: Excellent. It’s a pleasure to be on, and be the first.Trent: Go, Canada, go. [laughs] All right. For the folks who do not

know who you are or what you do, please take a moment and introduce

yourself and your company.Shaun: I consider myself an entrepreneur of life. I’ve had a business

since the age of 17, and a couple since; but most recently, what I’ve been

doing is a company called Blue Cow Creative Design and Productions, Ltd. We

do a lot of content creation for clients, including social media marketing

and lead capture, drip marketing, those kind of things.Trent: Okay. So, very much a marketing expert in the marketing agency

space, which is ideal because a lot of the people who are listening to this

show either run a firm like yours, aspire to run a firm like yours, or

could use the services of a firm like yours.You came to my attention because InfusionSoft profiled you for some

of the success that you’d been having since starting to use their

application. I want to talk a bit about that because obviously I’m a big

InfusionSoft fan. I use it myself and I think that there are people who are

considering using it, or could be using it, and I’d really love them to

hear from people who are having success with it.

With that said, you run a two-person agency?

Shaun: Yes.

Trent: Okay. Let’s jump to the conclusion first, So the people who are

wondering, ‘Why do I want to listen to this interview?’ Since starting to

use InfusionSoft, can you tell us a little bit about the results that

you’ve been able to achieve?

Shaun: We’ve been using it almost two years now. After the first year

of using it, we’ve noticed that our revenue has doubled from the previous

years. It wasn’t just a banner year just because of the economy, it was

actually what we have proven to be attributed to the benefit of using

InfusionSoft through educating our prospects before they actually decide to

work with us. And then the service after the sale, that it’s allowed us to

  1. That’s really what it has done for us and it’s almost like having two

other people working 24/7 for us when people are inquiring online.

Trent: Yeah. That’s pretty significant. Doubling your revenue and the

work of two other people.

Before InfusionSoft, how did you used to do what it is that you’re

doing now? Or did you even do it?

Shaun: If anybody listening is familiar with the old show MacGyver, I

say that we’ve MacGyvered a system together, where we had multiple

different systems out there running, one for invoicing, one for emailing,

one for contacts, and none of them really worked together. It wasn’t that

we looked at them as systems that didn’t work together. We just didn’t know

that there was a solution out there that would do it all in one.

When we heard about InfusionSoft and did the online demo, we were

hesitant that there was a claim that there was a service out there, that we

could subscribe to and use their software, and do all that. It took

probably six months for me to convince myself to take that leap and

actually try it, but it was the best decision we’ve done since then.

Trent: What you just said there is not uncommon. It’s a reasonably

good-sized investment up-front, a couple thousand dollars, and then it’s a

couple hundred dollars per month. I’ve had people email me who’ve listened

to the show, to ask about the pricing, and then right away, ‘Oh no, that’s

too much money.’ Did you think the same thing when you were looking at it

to begin with? Was that one of the things that was causing you to not pull

the trigger right away?

Shaun: Definitely. It wasn’t because I saw it as I didn’t have the

money to invest in it, it was just a big investment, especially for a small

business, a young entrepreneur who was just trying to make ends meet month-

to-month. Then, actually doing it, and looking at the other systems we used

where commonly they were considerably less per month, but you get what you

pay for. The time it saved us to not have to go between all those, it

actually works out cheaper if you figure out the time you’ve wasted with

the other services, by using their all-in-one solution.

Trent: Was there subcontractors that you used to use for various

manual processes, that now you’ve been able to automate and so you don’t

require those subcontractors, or even just your own time?

Shaun: It was my own time. It was replying to people’s inquiries about

common questions and those kind of things. For us, for what we do, because

a lot of the work is in creating a project and training our clients to use

it and be able to pedal on after the sale and use those solutions. To

educate them after, and have that resource there that they can come back

to, and currently drip information out to them after the fact to enhance

that service, was something that I would have had to spend a lot of time,

for one with a calendar and figure out, when do I send all this stuff, and

then actually physically have to do it. InfusionSoft just makes it all

simple for us.

Trent: Indeed it does. There’s three main pieces to InfusionSoft.

There’s the CRM component, there is the online shopping cart so you can

receive payments for whatever you would like, and then there’s the whole

marketing automation/email/autoresponder, however you would like to

describe that. I just call it the marketing automation piece. Are you using

all three pieces?

Shaun: I use all three. I use, more so, the campaign manager and the

campaign builder for a lot of the stuff. Probably about 80 percent of the

function we use it for, is for that. We have a lot of free resources on our

website where people can come in and request to download a free eBook or

free report, and then they get into a campaign where they’re getting drip

information about that, to convert them down the road, about when they want

to make that decision to move with a company like us, that they’re already

educated about what we do. We do that before the sale.

Then, after the sale, we use a lot of follow up through that, getting

people into education sequences, going out. We use the CRM, obviously, to

keep track of all the contact information, but also keep track of a lot of

the pertinent information regarding that client’s account, whether that’s

passwords, and things of that nature.

When it comes to the online payment and the eCommerce side, we don’t

use it as much. We don’t have an online store, but we do have certain

products. We do workshops where we get people to register and it processes

through that and puts them in the sequence for those workshops.

We wrote a book last year on marketing for small business and we sell

that through there, as well. There’s definitely a lot of power there on the

shopping side that we don’t use, but a lot of clients in different

industries could use it a lot more to their advantage than we do.

Trent: Yeah. Good segue into my next bit of questions. You started to

talk about free reports and capturing leads and so forth. I want to shift

to that because I think lead generation is a big problem for a lot of

people, especially when they are first starting out, or even when they’re

thinking about starting out. That’s probably the biggest fear I find in

people: How am I going to get my customers? In the next bit of the

interview, we’re going to talk specifically about what’s working for you

for lead generation, what you’re doing to nurture and educate those leads,

and then how you’re converting them to customers. Then, if we have time,

because I want to keep this under an hour, for sure, We’ll talk maybe a bit

about some of what you’re doing for up-sells and cross-sells and referrals.

Shaun: What we do for lead generation: when we started doing this kind

of thing, it was looking at people that were similar in our field and

seeing those mass numbers of contacts. Whether it was social media and

looking at their Facebook pages, to hearing about their email lists and

hearing about the thousands of people that they have, and being overwhelmed

by that and wondering how you can do it.

We’re looking to build quality connections as opposed to quantity. We

do it a lot through offering free webinars. We do a lot of them live, and

then we’re getting into more writing little white papers, two or three

pages, on things like permission marketing and Facebook advertising and

those kind of things.

In our industry here, most of the business community are owners over

45 years of age and up. So a lot of them haven’t grown up with the social

media side. They haven’t grown up with the technology. A big part of it

based around education. We don’t base it around, if you do this, you’re

going to make X amount of dollars, you’re going to bring X amount of

clients through your door. It’s education first. Then, they try it for a

bit, and then they want to take it to the next step. That’s usually the

point where they get in contact with us.

We do a really good job. We give them maximum information with

minimum commitment to begin, and that’s the key to lead generation. If you

want somebody to download something, if you want to email them something,

all you really need to give them, or for them to give you, is their email

address. You don’t need their address, you don’t need their phone number,

all that stuff. The more you ask for, the less you’re going to get. As you

get them through that whole sequence, and educating them, and building that

trust that you know what you’re talking about, then they’re going to be

more willing to give you that information down the road. That’s what we’ve

seen. It’s what we heard about first, and we tried it, and we see that it

works, so that’s what we’re doing.

Trent: Let me ask a follow-on question for that. You, like me and

probably everybody else, when you get that email address from an

individual, we really don’t know anything about them. In the case of Bright

Ideas, they could be a small business owner, they could be a marketing

consultant, they could be the CEO of a marketing agency, they could be

somebody thinking of starting a marketing agency. The way that I would want

to nurture and educate, because I have products across a couple of

different spectrums. Some products would be applicable to more than one of

those four categories, and other products wouldn’t. I don’t want to just

start sending out all my stuff to everybody, so I start to segment.

What is it that you do? You must segment somehow, because it’s not so

difficult to do. Can you talk a little bit about what you’re doing to make

sure that you get your list segmented in the right way?

Shaun: The information they’ve put out there for those lead generation

tools are very specific to that certain area. For example, we have one

where it’s a ten-video series on how to use Facebook, how to set it up, how

to do the very basics of it. We know that the people that are signing up

for that are very basic users. You’ll have the odd person that’ll sign up

because there’s something for free, but the majority of them are that way.

They’ll go through those ten videos, and then at the end we’ll make them an

offer to go to a more advanced phase, or they just sit there for a bit and

they just get periodic emails.

If they make the step up, then we know that they’re looking to go a

little further. The key is not, get an email and send them everything but

the dog’s lunch, it’s very segmented and making sure that you make them the

ones that control when they want the next bit of information. We find that

it works really well. Every webinar that we do, we do them for free, we get

a couple of really good leads that turn into clients, so it does pay back

itself multiple times after the fact. A lot of our clients that we try to

teach this to haven’t really grasped the concept of giving away something

for free. It’s like, ‘Why should I spend my time doing that if I’m not

getting paid for it?’ Well, you nurture them now, they’re going to pay you

back later if you do a good job at it.

Trent: Absolutely. It’s not as though you’re restricted to giving away

this information to one person at a time. The beauty, obviously, of a

webinar is that you can leverage your time by giving one bit of information

to many people at one time.

Shaun: The key that I’ve found with using InfusionSoft specifically

for this is that you’re not set to a start and end time. You spend the time

to create these products, create these sequences, and depending on when

people come into the funnel, whether it’s today or three weeks down the

road, they’re in the program. They’re getting the information based on the

time that they went in. It’s not like somebody’s going to miss some

information, and I think that’s what’s key to that. It allows us to

leverage the power of InfusionSoft above and beyond doing it manually, like

we had before.

Trent: Going back to what you were talking about with the lead

magnets. A lead magnet, by the way, in case people are unfamiliar with that

term, is what you are giving away to get the email address. It sounds like,

Shaun, that you have more than one lead magnet. How many different ones do

you have?

Shaun: We’ve done the webinars. We’ve recorded them, so those are now

available. People can go on there, sign up, then they get the link to the

videos. There’s probably two or three of those right now. We’ve got our

Facebook video series, we’ve got our book that we wrote, that’s now

available in eBook format and audiobook format for free as well. We’re

working on one right now, that’ll come out in probably the next couple of

weeks, on permission marketing.

Trent: Cool. Of those three, which one works the best for you?

Shaun: The videos. People like to be able to watch a video. The way

that we do them is solely with screencast for the trainings. People

actually get to see what we’re talking about, as opposed to giving them a

printed report. The printed report does all right, but not as well as

video, especially if you have some information to give out, just turning

the camera on and talking to the person will have a higher engagement, we

found.

Trent: I also think it goes a long way to build more trust, as well,

because they’re hearing your voice, and I think that we form a lot of our

opinions about how we feel about another person when we can either hear or

see them on our screen, versus just reading some text that they’ve written.

Shaun. Yes. You get to hear their voice, you get to see them. It’s all

those things that you would have if you were in front of that person. My

background is in video, so I’m a big fan of it. I think people are using

video more and I think they can use it even more as we move forward.

Trent: Speaking of video, I’m actually right in the process of

creating a new lead magnet myself, called The Conversion Tactics Toolkit.

If you’re listening to this on iTunes and you have not yet been to Bright

Ideas, go to BrightIdeas.co and you’ll be able to have an opportunity to

opt in to The Conversion Tactics Toolkit. It is an entirely video series.

All right. Is there anything that, in terms of capturing email

addresses, that’s working particularly well for you that I’ve not yet asked

you about, that you would tell somebody if you were sitting in a coffee

shop having this conversation?

Shaun: What I tell people is that if you’re doing this kind of thing,

and you’re on different platforms like social media, Twitter and Facebook,

is you need to have all your lead capturing/lead generation tools available

in all those different platforms. That’s worked really well for us. When we

create something new, we send it out to our existing email newsletter list

that we’ve gained over the years. We also put it on Facebook and do some

promotion there. We put it on Twitter and LinkedIn. The more relevant that

the information is to the networks that we’re doing, then we find we’re

getting some really good engagement that way.

Trent: Do you find that there is one social network that tends to work

better with the business audience than the others?

Shaun: Not really better, it depends on what we’re doing. Depending on

whether it’s a video series, or if it’s-, specifically let’s talk about the

Facebook one, because we had a higher engagement promoted out on Facebook

because they were in that medium when we were doing it. Whether it’s doing

that there, or sending it out by email, I think it’s relevant to what

you’re offering.

Trent: That makes a lot of sense. People hanging on Facebook would

obviously want to know how to use Facebook for marketing.

Shaun: Time of day, too, when you’re posting things. If you’re

targeting a business owner, which in most of the cases we are, we find a

higher engagement when it’s near the end of the day, as opposed to the

middle of the day because most people are engaged in their business. Even

on the weekends, surprisingly enough. At least here, we have a high

engagement of business owners that will subscribe to stuff on the weekends

because it’s low cost, in most cases free, for them to opt into it. That’s

when they’ve got some time to be online.

Trent: What are some things you’re doing to drive traffic to all these

offers? Are you getting traffic to your blog because you’re blogging, or

are you doing paid Facebook ads?

Shaun: We’ve done a little bit of paid Facebook ads, and they do

convert quite well for us. The majority of the stuff that we’re getting for

new leads is through our existing emails and through referrals. Most of our

new business, probably about 85% to 90% of it, is all referral-based. We

don’t do too much advertising. A lot of it comes through other people

sharing the content, being on our Facebook page, and those kinds of things.

Trent: Do you think there’s anything that you’re doing specifically

that’s stimulating those referrals, or is it just people who are genuinely

happy with the services you’re providing them?

Shaun: I think it’s the fact that we’re very real in the way we

present ourselves. We’re not making any false claims. We’re not giving them

the ‘This is the be-all solution to all your financial freedom.’ We make it

known that these are steps that you need to take to learn and know this

technology and we’re here if you want to take it to the next level. People

really appreciate that we’re not leading them in and making them sink or

swim.

Trent: Yeah. All right, let’s transition to nurturing now. You’ve

talked a bit about it. You’ve talked about the importance of educating

people, but I want to get a little bit more specific now, if we can. Let’s

use your video series, ‘Lead Capture,’ as the example of the guinea pig for

this part of the conversation.

Someone, they see your lead magnet, they give you their email

address, they hit the submit button, or the sign-me-up button, whatever

you’ve called it. What happens in that campaign builder? What have you

built, and what’s going to happen to that new subscriber? Walk us through

that.

Shaun: Once they sign up, they’ll initially get an email welcoming

them to the series, explaining what each of the videos are going to be

doing, and giving them the realistic expectation that they come out every

three days on a weekday and they spend whatever the length is there. In the

videos at the end, they’re then given a link to them. So that if for some

reason they can’t watch one, they’re going to get that in the end for that.

Throughout the process, then about a quarter of the way through,

we’re prompted to mail them out a letter just to introduce the company. No

sales or anything is in that letter. Just excited to have them going

through the series. Just introduce our website and those kind of things a

little bit more. Then, near the end, once they’ve finished, we’re prompted

to give them a call and see what they thought about it. See if they had any

further questions. They can talk to me personally about their journey

through Facebook.

We’re promoting it also as education, to use it on a personal level,

so we’re getting both sides of the fence there. Because I truly believe

that even though somebody might not be in a business and might not use it

for a business purpose, they know somebody that could. We’re not

eliminating educating those people that want to know how to use it for a

personal reason, too.

Trent: I’m very happy you mentioned that there was a call in your

sequence. I think that some people are needlessly scared of the telephone.

When you say call, they think cold call, and they think, ‘Ugh, I don’t ever

want to do that. That would be horrible.’ But, you’re not making a cold

call.

Shaun: No. That’s the key with putting the call near the end of the

sequence, as opposed to initially, at the beginning. If we put it right

when they signed up, we would technically be cold-calling them. Whereas at

the end, we’ve provided them ten videos, ten contact points of information

where we’re helping them every time. We’re never asking for the sale. Even

the call is not sales-oriented. It’s not, ‘Here we have a paid program’, or

anything like that. It’s ‘Just wanted to thank you for going through that.

Do you have any questions? If you ever want to take it to the next level,

this is who we are.’ We thank them for doing that. In most cases, we get

thank-yous back. Other times, we even get people saying that they’ve never

actually had a call that wasn’t pushy sales.

Trent: When you’re making these calls, do you find that people…

‘Hey, this is Shaun from Blue Cow,’ they’re like, ‘Oh hey, Shaun’. What’s

the response that you get, the vast majority of the time when they answer

the phone?

Shaun: They know who I am, even if I’ve never met them, because

they’ve heard me. Each of the videos are probably 15-20 minutes in length.

Some are shorter. They hear my voice throughout those videos. They know my

name. I introduce myself at the beginning, so it’s kind of like they

already know me when I call. It’s a familiar voice on the phone, as opposed

to getting somebody else to call.

Trent: Definitely it’s an easy phone call for you to make and it’s an

easy phone call for them to receive.

Shaun: That’s right.

Trent: How many times, even though you say it’s not a call to ‘be

pushy’ or ask for business, how, in your experience, are you finding that

some people are volunteering, ‘Hey, actually I would like to work with you

to do blah, blah,blah.’ or if that never happens, how are we starting to

convert some of these prospects to clients?

Shaun: Probably I have just over 50% of those people openly, as soon

as I thank them for that and I ask them if there’s anything else they might

need education on, they’ll openly tell me what it is. The rest of them, you

have to dig a little bit about that. I’ll ask, ‘How are you using

Facebook?’ first, if you have a business, and then I’ll ask, ‘How are you

using Facebook in your business?’ and they’re hoping to do some advertising

and that kind of stuff, so I lead them to one of our webinars on Facebook

advertising. Or, we have a report that goes with that and I tell them about

that. But probably more times than not, they want to schedule a time to

talk on the phone, and then, if we do a good job and convert them, then we

end up working with them.

We’re not scared to admit that the relationship is not a fit, if

that’s the case. A lot of people will not do that. They’ll just push and

push for the sale, whereas we want to work with a certain demographic of

business owners. If it doesn’t fit for us, and it doesn’t fit for them,

then we thank them and we both go our separate ways.

Trent: That’s a really, really important point, that you’ve brought

  1. Because a lot of small business owners, they get a few years in, and

then they realize they have this hodge-podge of customers, 20% of which are

generating 80% of the revenue. The other 80% are, kind of, a pain in their

butt because they took them maybe out of desperation in the early years. Or

they just took them for reasons that weren’t really solid reasons. Does

that sound familiar to you? Did you go through that experience, or were you

very choosy from the beginning?

Shaun: No, I was not very choosy. Starting out, any hook that came

into the water, I was biting at it. Using the InfusionSoft system, it’s has

allowed us to qualify those people and see, when they receive emails, what

are they clicking on? What are they doing? To see how interested they are,

so that when we talk to them, we can tell now if they’re really going to be

a key client. If we can’t help them, there’s no point in even going through

that process.

Even if the money’s there, we’d still do this work if we didn’t have

to get paid. We just enjoy doing it, especially if it’s helping people. But

also, that need to help people led us, in the early years, to jump at those

early leads because we feel that people were needing our help. We would

just do stuff. We’d discount some services just so they could use what

we’re doing. But in the end, like you said, that’s probably that 80 % that

just takes up more valuable time than you have, when really, they’re just a

one-off project whereas we’re trying to build long-term relationships.

Trent: You mentioned qualifying. I want to dig a little deeper into

that, if we can. In InfusionSoft, there’s something called lead scoring?

Shaun: Yes.

Trent: I apologize to the audience for all the frogs in my throat

today. I don’t really know why I’m having such a problem here, but I’m

doing my best. Are you using lead scoring, and if so, how are you using it

to help qualify the prospects that are in your funnel so that the people

who deserve the attention, be it the phone call and so forth, are getting

it?

Shaun: We currently don’t use lead scoring. I know the power of it. I

just don’t think that where I’m currently at with the business, that it

works for us the way we’d want it to. We do a lot of our qualifications by

the initial phone call and talking with people. We make it known that this

is what we hope to get out of this call and this initial consultation and

get them to commit to that first. Then we sit down. Just talking to people,

we find, is the best way to do it.

That doesn’t mean that I don’t go in and look at the back history to

see how many times they’ve been checking out our website, what they’ve been

looking at, before we sit down, so I can see how interested they are; or,

if they just decided to come to our website and call right away.

The lead scoring is a powerful tool, especially if you’re in a

business where you might even have a sales force or a sales team where it

can figure out if they’re a hot lead based on their interaction and those

kind of things.

Trent: When you are interviewing a prospective client, do you always

meet with them face-to-face before they become a client? Or, are you

sometimes getting clients who aren’t in your town?

Shaun: It depends on the situation. I prefer to meet face-to-face

whenever possible, but I realize sometimes that time restraints, distance,

and weather don’t allow that. We do a few phone calls for this kind of

thing, but in most cases we try to sit down. I think one of the key things

is to not come across as selling them something. But them identifying what

their needs are, what their goals are, and realizing that what we could

offer will be a solution to that. We find that’s really good.

One of the first things I ask somebody is, ‘What do you hope to get

out of working with us?’ They tell you right away. ‘This is what my problem

is and this is where I’d like to go with it.’ Now it gives us a target to

work towards. In some cases, that goal is something we can’t attain for

them, so it’s either try to get them to a realistic level, or just say,

‘Maybe there’s somebody else better suited for that.’

Trent: That’s a very powerful thing to be able to do. I know that when

I was running my last technology company, and this was in the early 2000s,

before any of this fancy-schmancy marketing automation stuff, that I was

aware of it maybe it existed. One of the first questions we would ask when

we would get a meeting with a new prospect is, ‘Why’d you take the

meeting?’ That was a really terrific way for someone to tell you their

agenda right at the beginning, so that you knew the points that you needed

to speak to so you’d have a chance of converting them into a good client.

Shaun: Yeah, for sure.

Trent: We’ve talked about how you’re capturing leads. We’ve talked

about how you’re nurturing leads. I think we’ve covered how you’re

converting your leads to customers as well, unless there’s anything else

there. Is there anything that’s major in your process on the conversion

part of it that we haven’t talked about?

Shaun: Because a lot of our new business and new leads comes from

referrals, it’s using the power of asking for testimonials. I’m a big fan

of testimonials and people telling their story of why they chose to work

with us. What they liked working with us, so we can use that on our

website, on our blog, on our social media, to promote that experience.

Because I think working with a company should be a positive experience as

opposed to just hiring somebody, and then not really understanding what it

is that we do. That talks back to what we do in the early stages with the

education. It’s not really a lot about educating them about what’s out

there. But educating them about the process we take with them, in the early

stages. So that they know they’re involved in that process and they don’t

feel left out.

One of the things we’ve heard a lot is that they’ve worked with other

companies and they don’t hear from them for a few days and they don’t

really know what it is that they’re doing. Then, they get a bill in the end

and hopefully the project is good, or not. That’s key to what we do.

Trent: How do you ask for testimonials? Do you just call them up and

ask them? Or do you have a process, campaign, something?

Shaun: Yeah, we just have a little note campaign that we add to that

contact at the end. Just thanking them that the project has completed and

we’ve successfully launched, depending on what it is. And just ask them to

go to our Facebook page and write their testimonial, as opposed to just

emailing it to us.

Trent: Wow, that’s cool.

Shaun: In most cases, but if they’re not on Facebook, then obviously

we take it by email, but we want it to come authentic from them and not

seem like we’ve reformatted it and pushed it out after the fact.

Trent: Then, you can take a screen shot of it on Facebook and reuse

that particular image wherever you like.

Shaun: That’s right. Plus, immediately, all their friends see that

they’ve posted something on our wall, and it helps that way.

Trent: Golden nugget, there it is. I’ve got to write that down –

testimonials on Facebook.

Shaun: You can always copy and paste it and use it in other things

after, but at least the original source is authentic.

Trent: Yeah. Okay. This nurturing process that we’ve been talking

about obviously is working very, very well for you. And you’d mentioned,

before InfusionSoft that this was not so easy. Did you nurture, in any way,

shape, or form, like you do now, only you did it manually and it took a lot

of work? Or, were you like maybe a lot of people out there who would get a

prospect, call them three or four times, ‘Nah, they don’t want to take the

meeting’, and then just give up?

Shaun: Yeah, the last one there, that was pretty much me. A lot of the

process of using InfusionSoft was learning the keys to nurturing and that

that was actually a key point to doing business. The benefit with

InfusionSoft is not just that they’re a software, but there’s a whole team

of people there that are invested in your growth and the well-being of your

company.

So if you have any questions about, ‘How could I use this element?’

It’s not just the p’s and q’s, and click here and do this. It’s ‘Here’s how

you take it offline, here’s how you use it.’ So I think that they’re really

great that way.

I’ve also been down to both InfusionCons in the last two years.

That’s a huge event that really helped me focus my business, learn what I

needed to do, and realize that I didn’t have all the answers, but I could

learn them down the road.

Trent: That is such an incredibly good point. I’m wondering if you do

this: back when I was running my technology company, I participated in a

couple of mastermind groups where, in one case, one of them was called True

Profit, and another one was called Vistage. We would meet, I think one of

them was four times a year, and the other one, I can’t remember. I think

also four times a year. You’d sit down in a room with other people who are

running companies exactly like what you’re running, just in a different

marketplace. And we would openly share a huge amount of detail in every

area, from marketing to operations, so that we could all learn from each

other.

I can’t emphasize how valuable that was, because you’re learning from

people who are doing exactly what you’re doing, and they’re running their

own businesses. Do you participate in anything like that?

Shaun: I currently don’t. I’m currently looking for something like

that. I do see the extreme value in a mastermind group, but just in the

area that we’re in, we haven’t found that kind of thing. We do a lot of

networking and talking to businesses in other areas that cover a lot of the

key basics of bookkeeping and all that other kind of things that we need to

talk about. But when it comes to specifics, we currently haven’t done

anything like that.

Trent: Okay. Well, I’m going to introduce you to something like that.

Bright Ideas does have a mastermind group. If you go to

BrightIdeas.co/mastermind, you can learn more about it. It is specifically

targeted to people who are marketing consultants and marketing agencies.

However, with that said, because that’s what, when you read the page,

actually by the time this is published, there will be a full page

explaining everything, Shaun. If you go there right now, it’s just what I

call the pre-launch page, where you can register for updates and so forth.

Even though, on the full page, which, people when they’re listening

to this will see it, I want them to understand that the principles and the

things that we talk about, and it starts off with a two day workshop, two

day online workshop. The principles that we talk about are going to be

highly applicable to whatever industry you’re in, but most of the people in

the group probably will be running marketing agencies. With that said, one

of my facilitators, and you probably know him, his name is Dustin Burleson.

That name ring a bell with you?

Shaun: No, it doesn’t.

Trent: Oh, okay. He was one of the Ultimate Marketer finalists at

InfusionCon this year. He’s the guy that has the orthodontics clinic

that…

Shaun: Okay, yes, now I know.

Trent: Four clinics now, because he’s using, it just blew up once he

started using InfusionSoft. He’s going to be inviting a number of the

people who attend, other orthodontists who attend his seminars. This first

one that we’re going to do, I’m not exactly sure of the mix of the people.

Regardless, if you’re looking for a mastermind group, just head over to

BrightIdeas.co/mastermind and there will be information there for you to

check out.

All right. Sorry, again, for all the frogs in my throat. I don’t know

why. What do I want to ask you about next? We were going to make a

transition, how are we doing for time? We’ve still got a bit of time.

Are you still – got a few minutes left?

Shaun: Yes, certainly.

Trent: I know. I know what it was. This wasn’t on my list of

questions, but you talked about this early on. We’ve talked a lot about how

InfusionSoft and the campaign builder is helping you with marketing, but I

want to talk about how it’s helping you with operations, and stuff that

happens after people become a client.

Can you speak to, because the campaign builder, I mean, campaigns

don’t have to be marketing-oriented. Because all a campaign is, is a

sequence of communication and activity, which is more or less any, and

almost every, business process. Can you talk about anything that you’re

doing in that regard?

Shaun: Well use a lot of the CRM side of InfusionSoft, with the custom

fields and and the custom tabs, to tailor it towards the information that

we need to keep about each client’s project. When we’re dealing with people

that we’re building websites for, or setting up online accounts, we keep a

lot of their account details in there; attach their records, so that if I

need to go in, or somebody else needs to go in later to send them that

information, it is there for them.

The other side is, also, using a lot of the tracking of the emails

that we send out. We can send them out through that so we can see when

they’ve opened them and any links that they clicked on. As for using any of

the sequences internally for the actual project building, usually once we

take on the project, when we finish it, a lot of that communication is just

done one-on-one with the client by our team, or any subcontractors that we

use. Then, after the sale, we go back and give them some resources about

using that service or that product that we’ve created for them.

Trent: Okay. All right, Shaun. Well, I want to thank you very much.

Oh, before I go, my lightning round. Can’t forget the lightning round.

Three questions.

Shaun: Okay.

Trent: Question number one: what are you most excited about for 2013?

Shaun: For 2013, what we’re more excited about it we’re launching a

new area to our business called the Seniors Learning Academy. Because here

in Nova Scotia, we have a large contingency of seniors who are using iPads

and a lot of them don’t know how to use them. This whole project is, first,

teaching them how to use these new pieces of technology for their

lifestyle. We’ll be rolling that out in a DVD learning series for them.

That’s what we’re really excited about, coming up.

Trent: Now is that a product you’re going to sell?

Shaun: Yes.

Trent: Okay. I was going to say, because how does that fit in with

lead gen? But now I get it. That’s just a revenue producer in its own

right.

All right. What is your favorite business book?

Shaun: Ooh, well, I’m currently reading, and I’m really liking, Seth

Godin’s ‘Permission Marketing.’ I really like the mindset of that. Anything

that he writes has been stellar, right from ‘The Purple Cow,’ to ‘Meatball

Sundae,’ I think is the latest one that I read before this. Anything Seth

Godin puts out, I think, is golden.

Trent: Finally, for the folks who have been listening to you now and

think, ‘Hey, I might like to do business with Shaun’, what’s the number one

easiest way for them to get in touch with you?

Shaun: The best way is to go to www.BlueCowCreative.ca.

Trent: Terrific. Shaun, thank you so much for making some time to be

on the show. It’s been a pleasure to have you on.

Shaun: It’s been a pleasure being here.

Trent: All right. To get to this show notes from today’s episode, go

to BrightIdeas.co/66. When you’re there, you’ll see all the links that

we’ve talked about today, plus some other valuable information that you can

use to ignite more growth in your business.

If you’re listening to this on your mobile phone, just text TRENT to

585858 and I’ll give you access to the ‘Massive Traffic Toolbox,’ which is

a compilation of all of the very best traffic generation strategies shared

with me by the many proven experts that have been guests here on the show.

As well, you’ll also be able to get a list of, what I feel, are the very

best interviews, thus far, that I have recorded. I can promise you will

discover many bright ideas as a result of those interviews.

Finally, if you really enjoyed this episode, please head over to

BrightIdeas.co/love, where you will find a link to leave us a rating in the

iTunes store.

That’s it for this episode. I am your host, Trent Dyrsmid, and I look

forward to seeing you in the next episode. Take care and have a wonderful

day.

Recording: Thanks very much for listening to the Bright Ideas podcast.

Check us out on the web at BrightIdeas.co.

About Shaun Whynacht

ShaunWhynacht-PromoShot-SmallAs a leader in social media consulting, Blue Cow is on the leading edge of technology application, combining an up-to-the minute understanding of current tools and trends with proven skills in creative design and video production to offer clients the latest, hippest approach to their business needs. But Blue Cow’s approach dictates that superior customer service and a personalized approach is the hallmark of their operation; here high tech meets down home.

It’s a business acumen that has made converts of business operators who have experienced the philosophy; developed by company President Shaun Whynacht; of educate, engage and accelerate in which clients learn about the options available, buy-in to those concepts, and then, through applying those tools and trends, meet their goals. But it’s a process that is preambled by Blue Cow’s astute understanding of the technologies and deep interest in the needs of the client. There’s no love-‘em and leave-‘em in these relationships – Blue Cow and their clients stay committed to each other for the long haul!

And with that track record, it’s no wonder that the youthful Mr. Whynacht (he’s, amazingly, just 32) has earned the attention of regional business leaders who have featured him and his firm in High Flyers, a showcase of the region’s most promising up-and-coming entrepreneurs.

How to Capture More Leads, Target Them More Effectively, and Sell More Products

Do you ever feel like there is just not enough time in the day to get everything done?

Do you feel like you have a crystal clear picture of exactly what success looks like for your business?

Would you like to hear from another small business owner who is successfully making the transition from owner/operator to just owner?

If you are looking for actionable tactics and strategies that you can use to spend more time working “on” your business, as opposed to “in” it, you are going to love listening in on the discussion that we have in this interview.

My guest on the show today is Brad Martineau, founder of Sixth Division – a leading source of coaching, training, and done for you services for Infusionsoft users.

When you listen to this interview, you are going to hear Brad and I talk about:

  • (9:35) Brad’s biggest challenge
  • (12:52) How to transition from Solopreneur to Entrepreneur
  • (18:05) The story of Pardot & what anyone building a business can learn from their strategies
  • (20:05) How to define what success means to you
  • (23:35) How plusthis helps capture more leads, target them more effectively, and sell more products
  • (27:15) How Iron Tribe (a past brightideas guest) uses plusthis with great success
  • (30:05) How to customize thank you pages
  • (30:10) How Laura Roeder (another past BrightIdeas guest) uses plusthis
  • (35:05) What transactional text messaging is and how you can use it to offer a speedy response to your customers
  • (40:05) How to use expiring promotions to offer time-limited discounts
  • (48:05) How to use a Cycler Tool to determine the order in which you deliver content
  • (55:00) Lightning Round

I learned a great deal in this interview, and strongly encourage that you go check it out now.

Links Mentioned

More About This Episode

The Bright Ideas podcast is the podcast for business owners and marketers who want to discover how to use online marketing and sales automation tactics to massively grow their business.

It’s designed to help marketing agencies and small business owners discover which online marketing strategies are working most effectively today – all from the mouths of expert entrepreneurs who are already making it big.

Listen Now

Leave some feedback:

Connect with Trent Dyrsmid:

Transcript

Trent

Dyrsmid: Hey there, Bright Idea hunters. Welcome to the Bright Ideas

podcast. I’m your host, Trent Dyrsmid and this is the podcast for marketing

agencies and entrepreneurs who want to discover how to use content

marketing and marketing automation to massively boost their business. My

guest on the show today is Brad Martineau, founder of Sixth Division, a

leading source of coaching, training and done-for-you services for

Infusionsoft users. They’re also the founder of a company called PlusThis

which we’re going to talk about in some detail in the interview.I met Brad while attending Infusion Con 13 and I learned of his new

venture which I just mentioned, PlusThis. They were a battle of the apps

finalist. They do some really cool stuff that integrates with Infusionsoft

and that’s why I wanted to give Brad an opportunity and talk about it.Before we get to that we’re going to talk about my technology tool

tip of the week. That is something called ‘Buffer App’. I use Buffer App to

very easily schedule up a bunch of social sharing. whether I want to put it

on LinkedIn, Facebook or Twitter. When I’m reading my RSS feed each morning

and I see stuff that I want to share with my particular audience if you

just hit the tweet button it’s all going to go out automatically right away

and I don’t necessarily want stuff to go that quickly. I like to stagger it

out. Buffer App, which is a free tool to use, you can get it at

BufferApp.com is a super easy way to stagger your distribution and choose

which of your social networks you want to share that traffic on.Lastly I want to make mention of an upcoming webinar that I have.

It’s called the Seven Secrets of Success for Small Businesses. If you want

to attend that webinar you’re going to learn all about something called

‘life cycle marketing’ which is a seven step process that I absolutely

promise you will have a massive impact on your business once you understand

and then embrace these seven steps in the business. If you are not yet a

subscriber and you want to get notified of that webinar just go to

BrightIdeas dot C-O, enter your details and you’ll definitely get emails

from me making you aware of the next webinar date.With all of that said please join me in welcoming Brad to the show.Hey, Brad. Welcome to the show.Brad

Martineau: Thanks. Glad to be here.

Trent: You recently have come out with this new tool, I’ve just

started to use it really early on and that’s why I wanted to have you on

the episode to have you talk a little bit about the tool and how you’re

using it to build your business and how your clients are using it to build

their business. It’s called PlusThis, it was a battle of the apps finalist

at Infusion Con 2013. That’s how I learned about it and I want to talk

about that but before we dive into that for people who don’t know who Brad

Martineau is or what you’re doing maybe just take a quick moment and

introduce yourself.

Brad: Yeah sure. Obviously, my name is Brad Martineau. Funny how I feel

compelled to say that even though you’ve said that several times. But

that’s my name in case anyone missed it the first time around. I’m a co-

founder at Sixth Division which is a company that provides marketing

services and coaching primarily right now our target market is people who

use Infusionsoft but we see ourselves at some point expanding to work with

the small business population at large.

My background very quickly. I was the sixth employee at Infusionsoft.

I believe it was back in 2004 was when I started so I was the entire

support team and then we hired a support team and I moved into

implementation. I was specifically just helping people implement the

software and I ended up in product management which is a fancy way of

saying that for about five and a half to six years I got to work on the

front lines with customers to figure out how they were using Infusionsoft

and quite frankly other tools in their business to run their business,

being able to see what worked, what doesn’t work. My job was to work with

our developers and our executive team to create a product development

pipeline and build features that were powerful and also made sense to

people.

I believe I had the best job that you can possibly have. Being able

to work with end users and customers and then being able to work hand in

hand with the developers. I had my fingerprints over pretty much every

feature that was developed the time that I was there. It was really fun to

see what technology could do and understand, at a level deeper than

probably any business owner ever cares to know and I don’t know that I

really care to still know that, but it was really good to get that deep

dive of, ‘This is what’s possible with technology,’ and have that blended

with, ‘Here’s what people are doing in the real world to build their

businesses.’

I did that for five and half to six years and I got to a point where

the stars aligned, planets aligned got to a point where it made sense for

me to branch off. I was going to solve all the problems in the world and

then reality hit, there was a learning curve like I think everybody goes

through of building and running and growing a business is a little bit

different in theory than it is in practice so there’s a little bit of a

learning curve but after a while I connected with Dave Lee who’s my

business partner. He also worked at Infusionsoft. We worked together for

about six years. He had subsequently left as well. We decided there’s a

need for a practical, down-to-earth yet elite team and service provider to

really help people grasp this concept of marketing automation and really,

as opposed to the tail wagging the dog, put the business owner and make

them be the dog that actually wags the tail. A lot of people get in and

jump on this train ride that is Infusionsoft and they’re holding on for

dear life. We want to put them back in control and really help them

leverage the power that Infusionsoft can bring their business.

That’s the short summary. I was at Infusionsoft and now we’ve got a

company over here where we help people unleash the full power of

Infusionsoft on their business. We’re having a blast, having a good time.

PlusThis was spun off…I don’t know if you follow 37 Signals but they

wrote a book early on and talked about by product and how some of their

products were created because it was just something they needed when they

were initially being a consulting company or building and designing

websites. PlusThis is the exact same thing. It was a, we were working with

clients… and maybe you’re going to ask where PlusThis came from so it’s

going to dovetail into that but we worked with a lot of clients and we

realised very, very quickly that there were almost zero implementations

that we could do, and do the way that we wanted to to really unlock

Infusionsoft without requiring a little bit of custom development. That’s

not to say you can’t make it work. It’s just to say that the way we wanted

to build it we needed some additional tools that weren’t available. We

started contracting a developer to build these little scripts that we

wrote, and we would install it on our customer’s web server and they could

do really cool things. We realized we were building the same things over

and over again.

I had had this idea when I left Infusionsoft to build a library of

scripts so we could put everything in one spot and once we realized we were

actually building the same scripts over and over again and the fact that

business owners don’t want to think about FTP or API or web servers or any

of that, most of them, so we wanted to build something so easy… we like

to joke around the office it had to be so easy that even Clate Mask could

use it, who’s the CEO of Infusionsoft. We set out to build this library of

features, that’s what PlusThis is and we ended up becoming a finalist in

Battle of the Apps. It’s debatable as to who should have won that contest

but we’ll let it go. That’s where we are now. We provide services and then

we have this software tool that we’re continuing to develop and add on to

and again, everything we focus on right now is helping the small business

get more out of Infusionsoft and really leverage the power that’s there

whether it be through services or through software.

Drysmid: For some of the folks who haven’t heard of Sixth Division where

are you located and how many people are coming to work there every day?

Brad: We’re in Chandler, Arizona so we’re ten minutes door to door from

Infusionsoft. Straight down the freeway from Infusionsoft. We have some

employees who are remote and who travel in to do services. We’ve got one in

Ohio, one in San Diego and then there are seven of us that work in the

office. So nine total plus a couple of contractors that do some pretty

regular work for us.

Drysmid: You’ve built a very nice small business. The reason I ask that

question is there are a lot of people listening to this who are a

solopreneur or maybe even a two person or a three person shop. I remember

when I was a solopreneur and I got to two and then I got to three. When I

was at three I was thinking, ‘Man, how do I get to six?’ When I was at six

I was thinking, ‘How do I get to ten? How do I get to twelve?’ I want to

make sure people understand that you’re a small business owner just like

they are and you have the same challenges in attracting new clients and

making sure profits arrive and systematizing and so forth to grow your

business just like they do.

Brad: Just one point on that. Our biggest challenge…and I don’t say

challenge like ‘we don’t know what to do’. It’s the next obstacle. But our

obstacle right now is creating systems and getting everything in place to

where my business partner and I can spend our time building the business

and not doing the work. There’s an interesting gap that you have to get

across, if you had asked me even nine months ago I don’t know that I would

have told you that within the next six to nine months that I would

literally be in a position where I would be building the business and not

doing the work. And quite frankly I don’t know that I would have told you

that I wanted to. I think that probably six months or so ago I wanted to

build a team because we needed more people to provide services but I was

excited about being involved in the work because it was my baby.

The thought process of how we go about doing what we do, a lot of

that was coming from me. My business partner’s more the marketing and the

sales side. The only reason I bring this up is because for the person who’s

sitting at three or even at six, depending on the type of business and

there’s variations, and all different types of business, but there’s a very

strong pull to want to hold tightly to the thing that you do, whether it be

providing a service or you’re building something. Whatever the case may be

there’s a very tight pull, almost magnetic, that you want to keep a grasp

on what it is that your company does. Really for the company to grow I’ve

had to come to realize and to learn that I have to get people that can do

that and empower them to do that because there is so much work that needs

to be done to establish a systematized business and then to create a

marketing plan to continue to bring in the leads. There’s a full time job,

if not multiple full time jobs, just to build a business and it’s what the

business owner should be doing. If there’s anybody listening that’s

struggling with that that’s something I definitely struggled with. There’s

definitely a mental shift that has to take place to go from ‘I’m going to

be doing this work, I’m going to be doing it,’ to get to the point where,

‘I could actually go hire people. If I could find the right people, I could

put the right people in place to be able to get myself to where I’m

building the business and not doing the work.’ But it takes a bit of a

shift of a mind set.

Drysmid: I’m glad you brought that up and I’m going to go down that

rabbit hole for a little bit before we shift and talk about PlusThis

because I think it’s a really importantly rabbit hole. The first thing is,

you talked about something and as you were saying I thought about this. You

can have growth or you can have control. I think that’s part of that big

mind shift. I’m interested in your opinion. Did you feel you had to give up

control to get to growth?

Brad: Absolutely. Infusionsoft offers this thing called ‘Elite Forum’. It’s

Clate and Scott teaching their methodology. Dave, my business partner, and

I were involved in that when we were at Infusionsoft. He made a really

interesting comment the last time I was there which was just a different

way – I’d never thought about it this way. He said, ‘Entrepreneurship is an

exercise in learning to let go.’ If that’s not the truest statement in the

world I’m not sure what is.

I believe 100% that in order for you to be able to grow, and not just

grow revenues, but to grow the business however it needs to grow you’ve got

to have the mentality of finding good people that you can empower to go do

the job. I’ll frame that and this is a critical point. You have to know

what you want out of your business first. There are a lot of people that

want a solopreneur shop and that’s what they want. They want the lifestyle,

they want to run everything and that’s great. What I would say is, know

what you want and then create a plan to get there. If you want the

solopreneur bit then don’t let other people convince you that you should be

hiring to grow. Because if you just want the solopreneur gig then make that

work and completely control your schedule.

What you do is, this is my formula. You start by saying, ‘What do I

want out of my business?’ Whether it’s solopreneur or build the business,

whatever it is create a plan that says, ‘This is what my life will look

like as a result of me building this business.’ For some people it’s going

to be solopreneur. For us, we know how big we want to get. We don’t want

100 coaches in our services business. That’s not what we’re trying to do.

That’s not what we want to build. Infusionsoft on the other hand, they want

the whole built-to-last approach.

I’m not going to sit here and even pretend to try and judge and say

which one is right because it depends on the business owner but the key is

to know what you’re trying to build and then once you know that, then the

next step is to create a business plan that allows you to get there. Once

you define your ideal lifestyle you should end up with a dollar amount and

‘This is what the profit needs to be so I can live this way and this is

what my schedule’s going to be.’ Once you have that defined now you can

create a business plan that says, ‘These are the products and or services

I’m going to offer and this is their price point and I need to be able to

sell X number of each one.’

I don’t want to take this too far down the rabbit hole but for anyone

that is chewing on that create-the-menu business plan I would read a book

by Michael Masterson called ‘Ready, Fire, Aim’ where he talks about your

first job is to sell your first product profitably. If you’re not at the

point where you’re into profitability and cranking with the product and

you’ve got five I’d cut four of them out and I’d focus on one. And I would

focus on your most expensive one because it gives you the most profit.

There’s a whole conversation there but first, identify your ideal lifestyle

and how many hours you want to be working and how much money do you want to

be making. Then you want to create a business plan. A business plan is

literally as simple as ‘These are my products and services. This is what I

charge for them. This is my margin. Here are my fixed expenses.’ You just

come up with an equation that will tell you exactly how many units you need

to sell. Once you decide on that you move to the next step which is go

create your marketing plan of how you’re going to get those clients.

I see a lot of people that every time they run into a roadblock they

go back and assume they have to change their business plan, their products,

their services or their pricing. I say, ‘No. Decide on that and move onto

your marketing and get better at marketing. Don’t blow up your business

every month because you don’t hit the numbers you want. Figure out how to

market the right product.’ That’s the formula that works for me. And that’s

what I’ve learned. Identify what you want your ideal lifestyle to look

like, come up with a business plan. What are you going to sell, how many

and at what price point and then go create a marketing plan to make that

happen. Then your energies and effort should be in the marketing plan and

making sure you’re driving that forward.

That forces you to have to let go of everything else because your job

is to then get those units to build the business to match whatever it is

you want your lifestyle to look like but you’ve got to let go of everything

else. You can’t be answering the phone when somebody calls in. You’re never

going to build the business to where you want it to be. Somebody else needs

to do that and you need to find someone you trust to do that. You may not

be able to take all the sales calls. I don’t do any sales calls and I

hardly do any implementation anymore on the services side and it’s a little

bit difficult for me at times. It’s hard to let go of that. But yes, I

agree 100% with your statement. we can either grow or I can have complete

control over everything. I’d rather grow and get to the point where we want

to build our business to because it makes everybody’s life better.

Drysmid: It does. Plus if you’re the solopreneur there’s never anything

that you can sell, you’re never building any equity. Nobody wants to buy a

business that is 100% dependent upon you. If you’re trying to build some

lasting value for yourself and your family and have the opportunity to

transition to retirement or real estate investments or whatever it is you

want to do when you don’t want to do this anymore you cannot be a

soloprenuer and make that happen.

Brad: Yeah, I’ll take thirty seconds. A really quick story to illustrate

that. I met a guy about six or seven years ago at a [inaudible 00:18:01]

Association conference named David Cummings. He’s the guy that founded

ParDot, the email marketing solution for bigger businesses. I don’t know

how many businesses he has but, very interesting, his model as the business

owner is he starts a business and the first thing he does is go out and

finds a president or a CEO to run the business. He builds everything around

systems so literally, he just sold ParDot to, I don’t remember who it was.

Exact Target or Vertical Response or somebody. He sold it. Because none of

the businesses depended on him…normally when you sell it’s going to be

cash less stock and then you’ve got to stay around for a year. He signed,

it was a 95% cash deal, he signed and and then he walked out, literally,

walked out the door the next day, in fact it was that day, and never went

back. Never had to do anything with it. There’s a lot of power and leverage

in having a business that can just run and crank and just go, all by itself

and you’re driving the business so that if somebody else wanted to buy it

they could just drive the business but the systems are already in place.

Trent: Just for my show notes, what was his name again?

Brad: David Cummings. For anyone who wants to follow he’s got an excellent

blog. He blogs everyday and it literally takes you two minutes to read it

and they’re amazing insights, short, bullet pointed stuff, but really,

really good insights. He’s a really good entrepreneur, great mind to

follow.

Trent: What’s his blog?

Brad: That’s a great question. I think it’s 10,000 Hours of

Entrepreneurship. If you just search for David Cummings it’ll come up.

Trent: I’ll make sure I include it the show notes. At the end of the

episode I’ll announce the link for how to get to show notes. Before we move

off this topic I wanted to offer up a book as well that I just finished

reading. In Canada there’s a company called 1-800-GOT-JUNK. They’re not in

Canada, they’re worldwide now. They’re one of the more phenomenal growth

stories of at least my hometown. Their COO for years, who has left them

now, I don’t remember his name, but his book is called Double Double.

Especially being a COO, he’s a real numbers guy and he talked a lot in

Double Double about pretty much, Brad, what you said.

Figure out what the outcome is that you want and then reverse engineer. His

name is Cameron Herold. Reverse everything you need to do to get there and

then figure out what your key performance indicators are and your job is to

watch those very closely on a weekly, daily, monthly basis to make sure

you’re hitting them. In his book he chapter by chapter breaks down how to

do all this. If it’s growth you want this is probably a book you’re going

to enjoy.

Brad: I don’t think it can be overstated, the importance of ‘decide what

you want and reverse engineer how to get there’. I think there are way too

many people who wake up every day and they go into an office and they feel

comfortable they spent eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve hours in an office

and they go home but they have absolutely zero bearing on whether or not

they are closer or further away from their goal. Usually I see the problem

is people haven’t started by defining what their goal is. They have no idea

what success looks like. And if I can throw out one last little bit on this

and then we can be done with it. It’s not easy to figure that out. I think

some people get into it and they try and write it down and they feel dumb

because they feel it should be easy to figure out. It’s not. It is a pain

in the freaking butt to figure out and really identify what you want.

It takes a lot of thought because you have to balance everything in

your life. If you’ve got kids you’ve got to balance out how it’s going to

work with your family, how much time do you want to spend versus how much

time do you want to spend in the business? I Ultimately it just comes down

to making a decision. It’s not easy. It’s a simple process but it does take

time and it is hard because you’ve got a lot of stuff to balance and

because you’ve never thought about it before.

If you’re an entrepreneur or a business owner and you don’t have a

clear number, meaning dollar amount/time amount, that you’re working

towards, then there’s a certain part of you that is just wasting time every

day when you wake up and go to work. You’ve got to know. If you’re trying

to lose weight it’s easy. You know exactly how much weight you’re trying to

lose and then you work towards that every single day. Same thing in

business. what are you trying to make happen in the business and what are

you working towards? You’ve got to decide that. It pains my soul every time

I talk to someone that doesn’t know. ‘What are you doing then? How do you

know if you’re being successful or not if you have no idea what your goal

is?’

Trent: It’s like going for a drive and not knowing where you

destination is. Or just driving around. At the beginning of Cameron’s book,

that’s what he devotes his first three chapters to. In fact, chapter one is

called Vision/Painted Picture and it’s preparing for fast growth. Very

good. I’m sure you would love it.

That was a cool rabbit hole, I’m glad we went down it and I’m quite

sure we served the audience by doing so.

Now I want to talk about PlusThis. Infusionsoft as you know and I

know and anyone who’s listening to this already knows is an amazingly

powerful tool so much so that people who don’t use it really don’t even

get. They don’t comprehend. I get emails from people every week saying,

‘Could you spend a little bit of time with me showing me why you’re so

excited about Infusionsoft?’ I do a little Skype and screen share and show

them how much of my stuff I’ve automated and usually their jaw is just

hanging open. ‘I had no idea. I thought it was an email program.’ Which

couldn’t be further from the truth.

You build this thing called ‘PlusThis’ which integrates very smoothly

with Infusionsoft because there are all these little problems that you want

to solve that are not necessarily super easy to solve with Infusionsoft.

We’re going to give some specific examples of that in about ten seconds and

how solutions to those problems can benefit the business. Let’s talk about

a couple of the features that you guys have developed early on in PlusThis.

Let’s start off with Stealth Video Tracking. What is it and why should

someone use it?

Brad: Perfect, let me just start. All of these we go through, our approach

to PlusThis. Let me just give the backdrop for that, all those will make

more sense. The end result of using Infusionsoft in our business is we want

to make more money. We can make more money by converting more people. We

can convert more people by getting the right message to the right person.

That requires us to know a couple of things. One, we need to know a heck of

a lot of information about the prospects and customers in our database so

we know if they’re the right person to send a particular message to.

We want to provide tools in PlusThis that allow us to capture and

store more information about our prospects and customers. What are they

doing, who are they? Then we want to build tools that allow us to send more

relevant and more targeted messaging that will lead to increased

conversion. The big picture backdrop is, capture more information so we

can be more targeting and convert more sales and make more money. That’s

the idea.

Stealth Video Tracking. The generic use of this is if you’re using

YouTube, Wistia is a video provider, or Vimeo, anyone of those three, we

can help you track how long people watch any of the videos you use in your

marketing. Probably the two most famous examples of this are Jermaine

Griggs. I’ve got a whole interview with him but but Jermaine Griggs. His

entire model is set up, he’s got four videos that he gives to his new leads

to start his opt in piece. And what he does is, he uses his videos to build

relationships with his customers. Also, on each video, next to each video

he’s got a little mini survey that allows him to capture additional

information. So what he does is, he sends people to go watch his videos. If

they don’t watch them I believe he sends them up to three or four

reminders to try and get them to go back and watch the video. If they watch

the video a couple of things happen. One, he knows they’re engaged in the

content so he knows they’re better likely to get an offer and actually buy

something. Two, he’s able to make jokes in his videos and start to build a

relationship with these people and three, he’s got a higher likelihood that

people will fill out the survey and give him even more information about

who they are and what they’re interested in.

So with the video tracking feature what you are able to do is track

of whether people have watched your videos or not and then you can adjust

your marketing based on that. So, for him, if somebody watches his first

video right away then the next video gets ‘unlocked’ the next day. If they

don’t watch it, then what happens is they get a reminder the next day to

watch video one and they’ll continue to get reminders up to three

reminders. At the end of three he’s like, ‘Fine, if you don’t watch video

one I’m going to try to get you to watch video two’. But because he knows

whether they’ve watched the video or not he’s able to then adjust his

marketing to make sure he’s preparing all his prospects the right way. On

the front end marketing side that’s one way you can use it. If he had a

sales team that was picking up the phone and calling, he doesn’t, but if he

did then they would be able to, when they opened up a contact record, would

be able to look at the contact record and as they’re talking to someone

they would know what that person has watched and what they haven’t watched.

Another example is Iron Track Fitness, they were the Ultimate

Marketer winners in 2012. Jermaine won in 2011. They’re selling franchises

now. They’re a gym out in Alabama but they’ve started franchising and

they’re at like 40 locations or something. Now what they do is, on the

franchise side of it, when they’re selling new franchises, they have their

entire education and basically franchise, onboarding process built into a

membership center and that’s all video based. They have a ton of training

that’s all video based and they take people through classes. What they do

is they use the video tracking feature to track whether or not somebody has

completed a course or not, whether they’re watching the videos. The people

that manage how their new franchisees are moving through the process can go

in and they have a simple little dashboard that tells them whether the

person is watching the videos or not. If they’re not they can pick up the

phone and be like, ‘Hey, look. You really need to watch this video because

it’s going to affect your franchise in this way, this way, and this way.’

It allows them to have better customer service for their franchises.

Whether it’s on the marketing side or whether you have an info

product and you want to be aware of whether people are watching or not. If

you’ve got an info product or a course and somebody’s not watching, that

person is going to be at risk to cancel or request a refund so it’ll let

you highlight who those people are. You can pick up the phone and call

them. On the flip side if it’s any of your marketing content, people that

are watching all your videos are at a higher likelihood that they are going

to be willing to buy. They are more interested. Those are the people you

want to call first or engage with first.

Again, it’s about giving you more information so you can either

change your conversation you’re having in person or automatically adjust

the conversation you’re having through emails or whatever other follow up

you’re doing.

Trent: For the folks who are maybe are not yet using Infusionsoft I

want to make sure there’s no details that are missed here. All of this

stuff happens on auto-pilot. When someone watches a video to a certain

point, which you define, you can then apply a tag within Infusionsoft and

when a tag gets applied you can trigger in the campaign builder all sorts

of actions whether they be phone calls or additional emails or what have

you. When Brad says ‘Germaine adjusts what he does’ it’s not as though he’s

sitting at his desk doing different stuff.

Brad: Quite the opposite actually. I think he literally works an hour a

week on that business that’s cranking out. Because he has it dialled in.

It’s totally 100% automated. All you do is build it once and then it runs

every time like clockwork.

Trent: If you’re interested in hearing more about Forrest Walden I did

interview him. You can get to that interview by going to BrightIdeas dot C-

O slash 3. It was a fascinating interview. Jermaine is actually going to be

on the show soon so if you want to catch that interview make sure you

become a subscriber and you’ll get a notification.

Let’s talk about customized thank-you pages. What’s the big deal

about those?

Brad: Stealth Video Tracking is more about capturing more data so that we

can start to tailor our message. customized thank-you Pages is a tool that

allows you to actually display customized messaging. When you get into

Infusionsoft it’s relatively easy, like you just described, to have

Infusionsoft automatically branch your messaging where if they watch the

video send them this series of emails and if they haven’t continue to send

them this series of emails. You can do all that inside Infusionsoft with

your emails or your voice broadcast or letters. You can have it branch in

terms of what you send out of Infusionsoft to your prospects or customers.

What Infusionsoft doesn’t have the capability to do is let you control the

message that you display immediately after somebody buys a product or fills

out a web form and opts into your website. Or fills out a survey that you

sent them if they opted in previously.

A really good example of this is: Laura Roder is a client of ours.

She teaches people about social media, she talks about Facebook and she

talks about Twitter and she talks about LinkedIn and Google Plus and

there’s a whole bunch of different social media tools. When somebody comes

to her website and they opt in, she’s going to want to ask them ‘What are

you most interested in?’ or ‘What are you having the most problems with?’

It only makes sense that if somebody checks off the box and says, ‘Hey,

Facebook is my biggest challenge right now,’ then it only makes sense that

the next page that shows up would be a page that talks about Facebook as

opposed to having one page. Imagine 100 people filling out this form and

let’s just say they were spread evenly across Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn

and Google Plus. You have two options. option number one is on the thank

you page you give a generic message that talks about all four of those. Or

you get tailored and based on their biggest problem you take Facebook

people to Facebook, you take Twitter people to Twitter, you take LinkedIn

people to LinkedIn and then you take Google Plus people to Google Plus. The

more you can keep your message 100% on target the higher your conversions

will be.

She’s excited because she’s able to use it increase her profit per

lead because as people are coming in, based on what she knows about them,

she’s able to deliver a very targeted thank you page after somebody fills

out the form. Now, the email messages will most definitely be targeted

because that’s handled inside Infusionsoft but the follow up marketing

starts on the thank you page of a web form. Most people don’t think of

that. I’ll see a lot of people that put up a web form to capture a lead and

all they’ll put on the thank you page is ‘thank you’. Really? They’re at

the peak of their interest. They’re most interested right when they opt in

or right when they fill out the form and the very first message they see is

the thank you page and a lot of people just throw up a generic ‘thank you’.

It’s like ‘No.’ That’s where you either continue to conversation or that’s

where you start selling something.

Another thing Laura will do and several of our other clients is let’s

just say somebody fills out a form to request a new report Seven, whatever.

Seven Secrets of whatever it is. On the thank you page they want to up sell

a particular product, say Product A. If somebody’s already bought Product A

you don’t want to offer them an up sell at a discounted price especially if

they bought at full price. customized thank-you pages also let you

comfortably and confidently put pages out there and allows you to take

anyone that’s already bought that particular product you basically branch

them to a page that is about something else. Maybe it’s an additional piece

of content or Product B. Try to sell them that product. So, customized

thank-you pages let you start creating a completely tailored message not in

your first email but actually on the thank you page when they’re looking

at it right there. You have 100% open rate on that page. Everybody sees it.

Trent: For anyone who would like to hear the interview with Laura

Roder I’ve done that, it’s at BrightIdeas.co/44. She has done a phenomenal

job of transitioning from what used to be just a web design, solopreneur

business, so this kind of dovetails into what Brad and I were talking about

earlier, into a team and a seven figure business with a very healthy profit

margin that she runs from her laptop on the road. Again, BrightIdeas.co/44

if you’d like to hear more about Laura’s story.

Brad: So much so that when we worked with her, which was last year she was

about ten minutes late. She was like, ‘Sorry I’m late. On Monday we decided

to move.’ She was engaged and they are moving to London in the span of a

week and a half. This was inspiring to me that she had her business set up

this way. In the span of a week and a half she decided to move to London,

sold everything in her house, moved to London and it didn’t disrupt

anything in her business. It was really impressive. Anyway, really

interesting story.

Trent: That’s one of the reasons why so many of us are enamoured with

online businesses because it does give you that flexibility. Where are we

time wise? Okay, we’re still good.

Let’s talk about transactional text messaging. Again, what’s the big

deal? Why should I care about this stuff?

Brad: Text messaging. We have a ton of clients that use it for reminders

for webinars, to get people onto webinars. We have a lot of clients that

set up appointments. The way that they sell and the way that we sell set up

appointments to meet with someone and it’s a consultation and then we sell

out of the consultation.

We’ve got a guy, I forget where he is, anyway, Clint Barr. He runs a

fitness business and his whole model is people opt in for free information

and then he drives them to come into the office, sit down and have a

consultation. When you get into the gym world and into the MMA world and

all those they have insanely high close rates, 85% to 90% of the people who

get to an appointment will close. And it’s because, before you walk into a

gym you usually have a pretty good idea whether you’re going to buy or not

so their thing is getting people to come in for the appointments. We set up

a follow up sequence where we would do some email remainders and also a

text message reminder to get the person to come in because text message has

a much higher read rate than email. He was saying that before we

implemented that he would usually have six or seven no shows a month and he

got it down to one no show a month.

If you look at that and it’s like, ‘Well, those numbers aren’t

massive,’ but when you consider he’s setting maybe 20 to 25 appointments a

month. That’s 20% to 25% of the people that are coming in, that are

scheduling appointments don’t show up, and then he gets five more people

to show up, well five more people to show up at an 80% close rate means

he’s adding four new clients. You factor that over the life of the client

because they’re signing up for a three, six or twelve month contract then

all of a sudden it’s a little bit bigger deal. When you multiply those

numbers across any other business with larger margins or higher ticket

items it’s definitely worth it. Small hinges swing big doors. This is a

small hinge that could potentially swing a very large door.

The other potentially slightly different and, I think, maybe more

interesting use of text messaging that he has just recently implemented, in

his business, and I think this is true in a lot of businesses, he’s found

that speed of response is huge. When somebody opts in or somebody requests

an appointment the amount of time that passes between the time they’ve

filled out a form and he gets them on the phone to have a conversation has

a lot to do with whether or not that person’s going to convert. What he did

was he set up his system to where the transactional text message, he gets

one sent to him every time somebody opts in or requests an appointment.

There are some points where the clock starts ticking and whenever that

happens he has a text message go to him. I think he actually has changed it

to go to the assistant that actually makes the calls so the text message

comes in, ‘Heads up. Brad Martineau just filled out the form requesting an

appointment. Here’s the phone number.’ He clicks on the phone number and

can call it right then and literally be connected to the person within a

minute if they pick up. It allows him to cut down on his time of response.

Another interesting idea or use case for text messaging is not to

send it to prospects or customers but to send it to myself as the business

owner or a key employee or potentially even partners. There are a lot of

different ways you can use that once you start to realize, ‘Wait a minute.

I don’t have to send this to the prospect. I can send it to anybody I want

if I have their information.’

Trent: Excuse me, I have a frog in my throat today. I actually built

that feature into my…I have a plug in that generates leads for marketing

consultants and marketing agencies. If you want to check it out go to Mobi,

M-O-B-I, LeadMagnet dot com. I have that feature that built into the plug

in where when someone fills out the form on the landing page if I’m the

vendor, the guy who wants to get the customer, it lights up my phone and

says, ‘Bob just filled out the form two seconds ago.’ On my Smartphone I

just tap the phone number that came in and you can instantly be on the

phone with Bob and say, ‘Bob, I notice you just filled out my form.’ That’s

the moment you want to talk to somebody because they emotionally have made

a purchase decision and you don’t want to lose out on that opportunity.

Brad: Exactly, exactly.

Trent: All right. I’ll try my best to keep the frog out of my throat.

I guess I talked too much over the Memorial Day weekend so apologies to

everybody for me coughing. In Robert Cialdini’s book, I think I pronounced

that properly, on… gosh now I’ve forgotten the title. But it was,

scarcely, where I’m going with this, feebly I might add…

Brad: ‘Influence’ right?

Trent: Yes, ‘Influence’ is the importance of scarcity in marketing.

It’s hardwired into us to be more inclined to act when there’s the

possibility of losing out on something. That transitions us into this thing

called ‘expiring promotions’. What are they, why should I care about them

and how does PlusThis help me make them go?

Brad: Yeah, absolutely. Anytime you’re creating an offer of any kind, one,

your offer needs to be irresistible and amazing in and of itself. In

addition to that, any time I’m creating an offer, and this is whether it’s

an offer on a landing page, an offer for somebody to buy something or

whether I’m presenting something from stage, it doesn’t even matter in

which medium I’m delivering the offer, I’m always considering how do I…

the way s that I make the offer really great are, one, you’ve got to have a

good offer to start. Two, some type of a discount that’s available for a

limited amount of time. I’ll usually throw in bonuses for the first certain

number of people, because the idea of scarcity is so real you’ve got to

make sure you include some element of ‘I need to act now so I can get

this, this, this and this.’ The idea of creating an environment where when

somebody comes into buy…when I was at Infusionsoft the VP of Sales used a

term I’d never heard before and I really liked it. He called it a ‘forcing

function’. He said, ‘You’ve got to have a forcing function. You have to

have something that pushes the person to buy. They can’t just sit around

and say ‘Oh, that’s a cool offer but I know it’ll be there forever. I’ll

buy later.’ It needs to be something that causes the person to sit up in

their chair and say, ‘Wait a minute. I need to consider this right now

because if I don’t right now I’m going to miss out on something.’ That’s

the idea behind expiring promotions. With PlusThis it’s not a single

feature, you use a couple of features together to pull off expiring

promotions but the idea is that when somebody comes and they opt in, they

get you some free piece of information and at some point in the cycle

what’s going to happen is, you need to say, ‘By the way, I have this

product you can buy, product A and I’m going to give you a discount if you

buy it within the next seven days or within the next fourteen days.’ You

get to choose what your cycle is.

One of our clients, Sean Greely runs Net Profit Explosion, he helps

fitness businesses build their businesses up. He uses this concept where

when people opt in he’s trying to get them onto a consultation. Normally

they charge for their consultations. So his offer is that within the first

30 days you can get a free consultation instead of having to pay for it if

you jump. The key elements of creating an expiring promotion are you have

to know when the promotion ends and with it expiring you want it to be

evergreen which means it can work for anybody. We’ll take Sean’s example.

You’re doing a 30 day promotional window. If Jim comes and opts in today

then in 30 days from now his offer needs to expire and I need to be able to

talk to him about his offer expiring in 30 days from today. What’s today?

May, whatever. Anyway, today.

If John comes and opts in next week I need his promotion to expire in

a week and 30 days. It’s got to be built where no matter when somebody

comes into my system I can create this promotion that expires based on when

they’re coming in and on their timetable. What you do is, we have a feature

that allows you to calculate a date, it’s called What’s the Date, but

calculate a date in the future.

So what you would do is you would say, ‘The first thing I want to do

when somebody comes into my system is I need to calculate when does their

promotion expire.’ If it’s a 30 days window we have a feature where you

say, take today’s date, add 30 days and it will create that date and store

it for you inside Infusionsoft. Then we use another feature that’s called

Humanize the Dates, because they’re storing it as a funky computer date. We

want to convert it so it’s readable like a human would read it so that we

can merge it into emails. As soon as somebody opts in PlusThis says, ‘I

know today is May 1 and this guy’s offer needs to expire on June 1.’ So

what it will do is, it will calculate June 1 and then convert it into a

human date so I can put it in an email and say, ‘Thanks for coming and

opting in. I’ve got an offer for you. You can buy this product at half off

plus I’ll throw in this bonus, this bonus and this bonus and you’ve got to

buy before June 1.’

Then I can schedule all of my follow up emails leading up to that

expiration date but it’s specific to each contact so, again, if somebody

comes in on May 1 their expiration date is June 1. If somebody comes in on

May 15 their expiration date is June 15. For every single person that comes

in there is an automatic built in sense of urgency and scarcity because

they’ve only got a certain amount of time to take advantage of that

particular offer. So what it does is, it allows you to create that scarcity

and increase sales and you don’t have to do anything with it. Just like we

talked about with Jermaine’s system before, it’s autopilot. The thing just

runs. Every time they come in you’re cranking out your expiring promotion.

That’s the idea. We have a lot of clients that have used that all over the

board with a lot of great success.

Trent: I want to jump into that one a little deeper because I’m

thinking how I could implement that with my own. I have my info products

which are products within Infusionsoft and then I use an order form. I’m

very familiar with promotional codes and so forth that you could give a

discount. How does your expiring promotions tie into that? How does it

actually work? Would I have to create more than one order form? Do I have

more than one promotional code? Within that 30 day window let’s say, I

wanted, just hypothetically speaking, If you buy in the first week I’m

going to give you 50% off, if you buy before week two the discount goes

down to 25% off and if you wait till the very end it’s only 10% off.

Brad: The most sure-fire way to do this is with either the new order form

or the shopping cart where you can pass promo codes through the link into

the order form or into the shopping cart. And then what you do, here’s the

deal. This is where it gets tricky, right? You’re going to send an email

in week one that says, ‘If you buy within the first week you’re going to

get 50% off,’ they still have that email even when they get into week two.

They can click on the link from that email so it can’t be embedded in that

link that they get a 50% discount because they can go back to it and click

later. The third feature that you use is actually the customized thank-you

page feature. So what you do is you go in and you create a customized thank-

you page that will route to, let’s say you have three different offers.

50%, 25% and full price. You’ll create a customized thank-you page that

says if they have a tag that says I should give them 50% off I’m going to

send them to the 50% off link which adds the same product into the cart but

it includes a 50% off promo code.

If they have a tag that says they should get 25% off we’ll forward

them on to a link that says add the same product but give them a 25% off.

If they have a tag that says no discount then just add to product to the

cart like normal. And then what happens out of PlusThis, is PlusThis gives

you a URL and you plug that into all of your links across any one of the

emails. It doesn’t matter which email it goes in and then throughout your

sequence you’re going to apply and remove tags that control which promotion

they get.

As soon as they opt in this person gets a 50% off promo. That runs

for a week and at the end of that week we take that tag off and we put on

the ‘this person gets a 25% promo’. End of the next week we take off 25%

and put they don’t get any discount. What happens is no matter what email

they get throughout that calendar time frame, those emails will all point

to the PlusThis customized thank-you page URL so when they click on it,

whether they click on it during the first, second or third week, they’ll go

to PlusThis. PlusThis is going to check which promotion or discount they

should get and it will then pass them along to the appropriate URL and

because you’re passing the promo code through the URL when they get to the

shopping cart all they’ll see is your generic shopping cart URL at the top

and they’ll have no idea that a promo code was entered so they have no way

to spoof it unless somehow they figure out what that promo code is.

Trent: Slick. Excuse me, the frogs are back. That is a fantastic tool.

The last one is the ‘Cycler Tool’. I don’t even know what that is

because I haven’t used it yet. Why do I care about that?

Brad: You can do this without PlusThis if you’re really bored and like to

build a bunch of stuff out of Infusionsoft, which I’ve found most people

would rather make money. I think the first time I built this was for Laura

Roder, again she talks about social media concepts. When I opt in I might

say, ‘Facebook is my biggest problem but I’m also interested in learning

about Twitter and LinkedIn. I don’t care about Google Plus.’ Any time you

are marketing to prospects that have a wide variety of interests across

different topics you immediately come across this dilemma of ‘Okay, how am

I going to keep track of what people want and then how am I going to choose

what to send them and in what order?’ So you can get into Infusionsoft.

With her we built something called a ‘Cycler’. Think of it as a wheel

basically. When somebody opts in the first thing we want to try and pitch

them on is Facebook. If I know they’re interested in Facebook and Twitter I

want to try to pitch them on Facebook first.

If I know they’re interested in Twitter and LinkedIn I’m going to try

Twitter first. She’s got four kinds of messages in her library of content.

Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn and Google Plus. When she goes to decide what

she needs to send to somebody first she needs to know what the person is

interested and then second, know if she’s already sent something. Once she

knows those two things, then she needs to have a priority of how she would

normally send things, if somebody was interested in everything what order

would she send all of her content in. So what this tool does, is it allows

you to go into PlusThis and say, ‘My library of content is broken up across

these four topics.’ And I’ll stick with Laura as a specific example.

Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn and Google Plus. ‘If somebody’s interested in

all four I want to market to them, first I want to talk to them about

Facebook. If that doesn’t work I’ll talk about Twitter, if that doesn’t

work or even if it does, then I’ll talk about LinkedIn and then I’ll talk

about Google Plus.’ You go into PlusThis and you set those four up as

pieces of content that you have that you want to send out. You create a tag

for whether the person is interested in each one of those and then you have

a tag that says ‘start this content’, meaning either send this email or

start this entire sequence.

We also set this up for Casey Graham and the Rocket Company. They

were the 2013 Ultimate Marketers. They just came out and we built a similar

thing for them. Where, when somebody opts in, lets say somebody comes in

and says, ‘I’m interested in Facebook and I’m interested in LinkedIn,’

instead of choosing a sequence to start we just run an ACTP post to

PlusThis. PlusThis, say Okay, let me go check and see what this person,

it’ll basically say ‘Number one is Facebook. Let me go see if this person

has a Facebook tag that says they’re interested. If they do then I’m going

to go check and see if I’ve already sent them the Facebook content. If I

haven’t I’m going to start the Facebook content and I’m going to stop.

PlusThis doesn’t do anything else, it starts the Facebook sequence. Once

the Facebook sequence is done, then what I can do is I can run that same

ACTP post again and it will come back to PlusThis. Are they interested in

Facebook? Yes. Have I already sent the content to them? Yes. Okay, let me

move to the next one. Are they interested in Twitter? No, I don’t have a

tag for that. Okay I’m going to move to the next one. Are they interested

in LinkedIn? Yes. Have I sent it before? No. Okay, let me send the LinkedIn

content. It allows you to take this library of content and it allows you to

organize it any way that you want and you plug it into PlusThis and you can

prioritize.

For example, this may be a more specific example. you have a whole

bunch of interviews to talk about whole bunch of different stuff. Let’s say

you went through all your interviews, you’ve got at least 44. Because I’m

counting your numbers as you go up. As you look at all the interviews you

could categorize them and say, ‘This is a marketing interview. This is a

business building interview. This is a leadership interview. This is a

technology interview.’ You could label them all that way. Then what you do

is you say, I’m going to have people opt in and I want to know what they’re

interested in. I’m going to give them options. ‘I’m interested in marketing

and I’m interested in technology. I don’t really care about leadership and

business building.’

Instead of you building out this really intricate fancy campaign

inside Infusionsoft you go into PlusThis and you say, ‘Hey look. I’ve got

interviews for every interview you create a new entry in this cycler tool.

For all the interviews that are marked ‘marketing’ you’ll set it and say,

‘Hey if they’ve got the marketing tag I want to send this interview. Then

you have a tag that will kick off that interview and actually send it. Then

when you’re building out your ongoing [inaudible 00:52:44] you’re deciding

what email or what interview you want to release this week, instead of

putting an email in you put in an ACTP post that goes to PlusThis and says,

‘Hey, go grab the next interview that this person’s interested in that I

haven’t yet sent.’ It will automatically kick if off. It allows you to, you

basically put this library of content up and let PlusThis decide, based on

how you build it, PlusThis decides what to send and who it should be sent

to based on what they’e told you they’re interested in.

So as you add new interviews you might have a really hot interview on

marketing and you want to be sure that’s the next interview anybody gets

who’s interested in marketing. You go into PlusThis and add it to the top

of the Cycler and next time that ACTP post runs to PlusThis, no matter how

far down the list of interviews somebody is the next time it comes back

it’ll take that one first and say ‘Hey, are they interested? Yes, because

they said they were interested in marketing’. Second, ‘have I sent it? No.

It’s a brand new interview.’ And that will go out next to everybody who’s

interested in marketing.

Trent: That is very cool.

Brad: So anyway, what you get to do is, you build the logic of what kind of

content you’re going to produce and then all you have to do is just fill

the library. PlusThis will keep track of who should get what based on what

they’re already received and based on what they’re interested in. It

greatly reduces the complexity of, have I already sent this to somebody? It

allows you to leverage your content better too because you can just create

a library and you don’t have to think through who I should send what to.

PlusThis does it automatically.

Trent: Yeah that’s very cool.

Brad: That one’s a little harder to visualize so I apologize to everybody

on the call, once you see it it’s a little bit easier. It’s extremely

powerful in being able to cycle through different offers and promotions and

stuff like that.

Trent: Okay. Regarding the number of interviews it’s actually much

more than 44. If you want to listen to Casey Graham you can go to

BrightIdeas.co/63. I think we’re up around 70 or so, they’re not all up.

Two a week. I’m cranking them out. All right, so that pretty much sums up

all I wanted to cover.

We just dumped a ton of marketing automation madness on the audience

and I took feverish notes and I will mention like I say at the very end of

this episode what the URL will be to get to these show notes. Actually I

can tell you now. It’s going to be BrightIdeas.co/65. So there you go Brad

you’re number 65.

Brad: Sweet.

Trent: We’ll wrap up with the lightning round. Brad, what are you most

excited about for 2013.

Brad: I am most excited because 2013 is the year I’m going to go from being

an owner-operator to an owner and it will be two businesses. We’re starting

to treat PlusThis as a totally separate business from our services. We’ve

got some other software ideas that are bubbling but I’m excited because

this will be the year where we get our systems in place, we’ve got a killer

team in place that’s cranking and it will allow me to leverage my strengths

in way better ways than I ever could realize before. I’m stoked because I’m

starting to feel the freedom. It’s not the I went through the ‘Oh I’m

excited because I’ve freedom I can go do whatever I want. And then I

realized you know what, it’s not like-, I’m 33, I’m not at the point where

I’m trying to not work for a year. What I want to do is I want to have is a

manageable schedule and make cool stuff happen and starting to get to the

point of tasting the way that we’re going to be able to make really cool

stuff happen is by me not being involved in delivering all of the work, but

actually having the freedom to be able to apply a strategic vision to our

business. And we’ve got two really good product offerings that I think

we’re just scratching the surface of what we can do on both sides. I’m

excited because I’m right at that threshold of being able to get over the

humps, so to speak. And I feel like over the next couple of years we’re

going to be able to explode both PlusThis and the services side and I’ve

got a couple of other software things that that will hopefully be coming

out relatively soon.

Trent: Very cool. Make sure you let me know and if they fit with the

audience that I’ve got, which I’m sure they will, I’ll be happy to have you

back.

Brad: Perfect.

Trent: What is your favorite business book?

Brad: That is a tough question. I saw this when you sent the question over

before when you at least you were nice enough to warn me that you were

going to ask that. It depends, is my answer. It depends on what area of

business, like, business is not like simple things. So there’s a bunch of

different aspects to it.

Trent: Absolutely.

Brad: So I’ll just rattle off a couple that I really, really, really like.

One of them is ‘Ready, Fire Aim’ by Michael Masterson. I jokingly refer to

that as one of my bibles for building my business. It is such a practical

down to earth and logical approach to growing a business and so, there’s a

quick summary and he gives four phases that every business goes through. I

have read the overview of all four and I actually have only read the first

section and a half because that’s all that applies to my business and I had

enough stuff to go run and work with. So, love that one.

I love Verne Harnish, ‘Mastering The Rockefeller Habits’ it’s a great

read. Pretty simple read too but a great read to start to wrap your brain

around metrics and how to track them. The only caution that I would throw

out is depending on where your business is that book may… read it as a

student, not as a follower. Meaning read it to take ideas and then realize

that all the stuff he talks about may not be critical depending on where

your business is, but it’s a great frame of reference. Like, ‘Yes, I need

to be doing metrics. I need to be having reporting in place.’ So that’s a

great book.

Let me think what other like.

Trent: Well lets stop with two.

Brad: Okay, we’ll stop with two.

Trent: Two is good.

Brad: Oh, I got one more. Sorry, one more. This one I think is

awesome. For pricing and sales. It’s ‘No BS Pricing Strategy’ by Dan

Kennedy. Amazing, amazing book to help you understand how to price and how

to sell. Great book. So those three, money.

Trent: Okay. And for people that want to get hold of you, what is the

one easiest way for them to do that?

Brad: Go to sixthdivision.com We do a similar interview approach. We’ve

done a bunch of video interviews with marketers, Jermaine Griggs is one of

them. You can go there, and opt in for the interviews and get access to a

bunch of content there and then.

If you are an Infusionsoft user and are interested in anything else

we have to offer you’ll be prompted to schedule a consultation but as you

go through that process… so sixthdivision.com on the services side,

that’s the best place to find out anything about what we’re doing and then

PlusThis.com on the software side. But that’s pretty much where we are.

That’s where all of our stuff is at.

Trent: All right my friend. Thank you so much for making some time to

come on the show. I really enjoyed this interview and I’m sure the audience

did as well.

Brad: Thanks for having me.

Trent: You’re welcome to come back any time you like.

Brad: All right. Awesome.

Trent: All right. To get to the show notes from today’s episode go to

BrightIdeas.co/65. When you’re there you’ll see all the links that we’ve

talked about today plus some other valuable information you can use to

ignite more growth in your business.

If you’re listening to this on you mobile phone while you’re driving

or doing whatever, just send a text – rather, just text TRENT to 585858 and

I’m going to give you access to the massive traffic toolbox, which is a

compilation of all the very best traffic generation strategies that have

been shared with me by my many proven experts that have been guests here on

the show.

As well, you’ll also be able to get a list of all my favorite

episodes that I’ve published thus far on the blog.

And finally, if you really enjoyed this episode, please head over to

BrightIdeas.co/love where you’ll be able to give or rather find the link to

leave us a rating in the iTunes store and I would really appreciate it if

you would take a moment to do that, because it helps the show to build its

audience and the more audience members we have, of course the more people

we can help to massively boost their business.

So that’s it for this episode. I’m your host, Trent Dyrsmid and I

look forward to seeing you in the next episode.

Take care and have a wonderful day.

Recording: Thanks very much for listening to the Bright Ideas podcast.

Check us out on the web at BrightIdeas.co.

About Brad Martineau

bradmug2-copyBrad Martineau, Co-Founder of Sixth Division, serves the small business community as the leading provider of coaching and software tools that help entrepreneurs tap into the power of marketing automation.  He’s consulted thousands of successful entrepreneurs, business owners, and top marketers around the world.  He loves teaching and helping people understand difficult concepts.  Nothing drives him nuts more than seeing someone NOT do something because they don’t know how.

Back in the day, he was the sixth employee at Infusionsoft, and spent over six years leading the product development efforts as a key member of the Infusionsoft leadership team.  He had a blast and learned a ton doing this, all while getting to rub shoulders with many very highly successful entrepreneurs.

Brad is married with five kids, loves playing basketball, is addicted to fitted hats, and is pretty into the whole entrepreneur thing.

Digital Marketing Strategy: The Story of How Digital Relevance Grew by 3,596% in 3 Years

If you heard about a marketing agency that had increased revenue by 3,596.8% over a 3 year period, do you think that would be a firm you’d want to learn from?

Are you looking for ways to get more attention for your firm (or your clients) from the media?

If you answered yes to either of these questions, you are in luck!

In this episode of the Bright Ideas podcast, my guest is Aaron Aders, co-founder and Market Research Director of Digital Relevance (formerly Slingshot SEO) which was named the fastest growing private company in Central Indiana with a 3 year growth rate of 3596.8%!

When you listen to this fascinating and informative interview, you are going to hear Aaron and I talk about:

  • (00:00) the service that his firm offers that is in such huge demand
  • (3:00) how they launched their company without any outside funding
  • (4:00) a very ingenious referral strategy that played a pivotal role in their very early days
  • (5:50) how they produced an industry report that literally catapulted them into the spotlight and brought them to the attention of their target market
  • (11:00) how they got their next report, a blog optimization guide, covered by Inc magazine
  • (16:00) an overview of their Tier 1, Tier 2 and Tier 3 content production plans that is used to underpin all the media attention they receive
  • (20:00) how they produce their own blog content, how Google authorship plays a role, and how to get credit (from Google) to their writing team
  • (24:00) how they nurture their leads to become qualified prospects that the sales team should talk to
  • (28:00) an explanation of the specific process that a lead goes through in their funnels to become qualified

I learned a great deal in this interview, and strongly encourage that you go check it out now.

Links

More About This Episode

The Bright Ideas podcast is the podcast for business owners and marketers who want to discover how to use online marketing and sales automation tactics to massively grow their business.

It’s designed to help marketing agencies and small business owners discover which online marketing strategies are working most effectively today – all from the mouths of expert entrepreneurs who are already making it big.

Listen Now

Leave some feedback:

Connect with Trent Dyrsmid:

Transcript

Trent: Hey there bright idea hunters. Welcome to the Bright Ideas

Broadcast. I’m your host Trent Dyrsmid and this is the

broadcast for marketing agencies and entrepreneurs who want to

discover how to use content marketing and marketing automation

to massively boost their business.On the show with me today is Aaron Aders, co-founder and Market

Research Director of Digital Relevance formerly known as

Slingshot SEO, which was named one of the fastest growing

private companies in central Indiana with a three year growth

rate of, check this, 3596.8%. You are absolutely going to love

this interview with Aaron. Before we get to that I want to go

over my tool tip and I’ve got a special announcement webinar

coming up.So the tool tip for this episode is something called the Fancier

Author Box by ThematoSoup and it’s a free WordPress plug in that

you can download and in this interview you are going to learn

why this is so important. But to basically to boil it down to a

nutshell this allows you to make sure that the author of each

blog post is properly credited in the eyes of Google for the

purposes of Google Authorship, which is an increasingly

important component to SEO, so it allows you to insure that each

writer is properly credited and that will help your SEO efforts.

So you can just Google it Fancier Author Box of course it there

will be a link in and show notes as well.And so the webinar coming up is the webinar on lifecycle marketing

and if this topic you’re not going familiar with I strongly

encourage you to become a subscriber to Bright Ideas just go to

brightideas.co and you will receive notifications of the next

webinar coming up as this has been proven to be a very popular

webinar for folks who to want better learn how to use this

concept called lifecycle marketing to make customer traction oh,

so much easier.So with all of that said, please join me in welcoming Aaron to the

show. Aaron, welcome to the show.Aaron: Hey, thanks for having me here, I really appreciate the

opportunity.Trent: No problem at all. I appreciate you making the time to come and

share with the Bright Ideas audience what’s working for your

firm. So for the folks who don’t yet know who you are or much

really about your business can you just briefly introduce

yourself and your company in your own words?

Aaron: Yeah, no problem, Trent. My name is Aaron Aders and I’m co-

founder of Digital Relevance Inc. and what we do is mostly earn

media online so usually what that means is we work with

companies to create valuable content that target marketing will

find value in and do a visual PR effort to get that out to the

industry influential websites and things of that nature. So the

result from that is a mix of leads and search engines traffic

and the results of those links and the content and a email list

growth, a lot of digital marketing return that really have the

biggest ROI and SEO and such a media and such, so that is

Digital Relevance and I’m one of the co-founders.

Trent: Cool. So we might dive into that a little bit more in a few

minutes, but before we do I just want to kind of give our

readers our listeners as of why I invited you on the show. I was

traveling around the Internet as I always do and I don’t even

remember where off the top of my head now that we discovered you

but what stood out was your growth rate over the past three

years. You grew at 3596.8% over three years. That is a

whopping amount of growth.

You want to know kind of…where were you three years ago in terms of

how big the company was and where are you now and what in the

heck did you do to cause so much growth to happen?

Aaron: Well it was an interesting ride for sure along our growth

there. We took an interesting position beginning that we wanted

to bootstrap this thing and grow organically because I think

that is just a real natural way to grow through. I guess client

referrals and on the back of your work rather some fundraising

effort that just goes out and hires a lot of sales people; not

that that’s bad. It can get a lot of traction from new ideas but

it just wasn’t the idea that we wanted to go by because I

believe being in services is a little bit different then if you

had a product or something like that, it makes sense to a

fundraising for.

So as a service writer . . . well first of all, when we started this

company, I was 26 years old and we didn’t really have a whole

lot of funding between us or anything else, but we did have a

list of people that were interested in our services. So kind of

as when we were starting off a bit of our strategy was, “Okay,

let’s get these clients on board, let’s do great by them,” and

we took some of the first contracts to kind of, not quite a loss

but just about. I mean we were eating beans at the time to give

you an idea there.

When we took this contract we said we’re going to do this for you at

somewhat of a discounted rate and basically all we ask is that

when we make you successful, not if, but when, you tell three

other people about us and we’ll make that pitch at the contract

of signing and hold it back. We never really had anyone turn

that down but it was very effective in growing us. Because we

did hold people to telling other business owners about our

company so that kind of word of mouth marketing was really how

we grew our business in the beginning. The 3,000% growth rate,

that was past. I think you were referring to the Inc. 500

number.

Trent: Probably.

Aaron: I think you have to . . . you can’t say anything to them until

they make over a $100,000 but still, at that point we really had

a pretty small market, inbound marketing team but it was mostly

by word of mouth. We didn’t stop taking projects at losses was

obviously, and grew that way but it was really through clients’

success and really being adamant that when we make you

successful we expect that. When you do right by people and do a

good job for them and especially in marketing, I think that’s

something people like to brag about.

We got our start in SEO and having rankings being number one or

number two or whatever for a certain keywords that people like

to brag about that as well, so I think that also helped us.

Trent: Yeah. No question. So let’s go back then to, because it seems

to me that the growth has really been the byproduct of this,

what you said at the very beginning of the interview, you create

valuable content, combine it with PR campaigns and that ends up

helping the SEO or helping the ranking of your clients for a

given keyword set of keywords.

So if I’m to understand what you’ve explained so far it’s the result

of your work, combined with that referral strategy that caused

all the growth as opposed to doing a lot of webinars or doing a

lot of lead magnets or doing other things, am I correct or is

growth coming from two places?

Aaron: Well, as we scaled when we got larger we had beef up our

marketing department and our marketing efforts just to keep up

that growth rate because doubling every year gets twice as hard

every year as we scale. So we did have to pick up, but again

all of the marketing that we do–I should say the marketing that

we do for our clients–which is webinars, white papers and

research guides.

In fact, probably the most successful marketing campaign that we ever

did was a click through rate study that we released in 2011 and

so that was really significant because unless you are a search

engine or a digital marketing company doing the SEO campaign for

a ton of clients, you really don’t have the data to show real in-

depth and informative click through rates on certain keywords.

So that’s essentially was what it was. The PR study was looking

at top ten results, how much percentage of clicks the number one

position get versus the number two through ten.

So since we had such a large client base of SEO customers, we had the

data to have a very significant sample set and now there was

something in that we put together pretty quickly. We were

already tracking the data, we already had it in there, but we

created this what we call a contribution. A contribution is

something that . . . our target market finds valuable and our

target market is essentially marketing directors, VPs of

marketing. This was something that was very important to them–

understanding click through rates so they can plan their

campaigns.

So when we developed that and we went to market with it, that was

talking to, in our case, Search Engine Land and Search Engine

Journal. Websites like that, these industry, influential, what

Google refers to at hilltops, so these authority basis

essentially. So we went there, they loved it, and they were

in fact fighting over the first rights to release it and we

ended up releasing it on Search Engine Land and then released on

guest articles on a lot of other places that were still willing

to take that even though they didn’t get the first release.

But if you have a contribution that valuable, then you’re going to

see those links and the placements come very naturally but you

have to combine the contribution which is obviously putting

upfront effort to create something quality, very targeted, and

then combine that with an earned media strategy and that is the

effective, again, also targeted outreach. So all of that has to

be in sync and speaking to the same audience.

And if you can put all those pieces together then that’s essentially

what we do at Digital Relevance and that’s what I do. I’m kind

of the digital relevance at Digital Relevance here on a day to

day basis so it’s a really fun job and a great way to grow your

business.

Trent: So this report that you’re speaking of is this called the Tale

of Two Studies: Establishing Google and Bing Click Through

rates?

Aaron: Yeah, you were able to find that pretty quickly. I mean that

study was so effective and driving leads to us, driving links.

We instantly started ranking for everything around click through

rates, but it kind of raised the ship on all fronts because we

suddenly became the center of authority and kind of helped out

on our own right because of so many links from other hilltops in

our industry. That was so powerful and it really kicked off the

discovery of . . . well, earned media and contribution that is

just a way that you have to of SEO and optimizing for search

going forward.

Trent: It’s interesting that you mentioned so much success with this

and I want to make a shout out to a past guest of mine in a past

episode because what you’re describing is what Mike Stelzner of

Social Media Examiner calls Nuclear Fuel in his book, “Launch”.

And I did an interview with Mike. It’s brightideas.co/7. If any

of the audience would like to go and check it out and we go into

a lot of detail on producing what is called or what Mike calls

Nuclear Fuel and your report absolutely falls into that

category.

It’s something that attracts a ton of attention to your firm or your

brand and gets a lot of coverage and ends up on a whole bunch of

links that’s coming into you and that’s exactly what you’ve been

describing.

So now, I see on your site you’ve done a couple of other reports.

There’s an enterprise blog post optimization guide and a

Facebook graph search cheat sheet. Did either of those reports

have the impact for you that the click through rate report did?

Aaron: Yeah. Like I said, the click through rate report was definitely

the biggest but those were also very impactful. For example the

blog optimization guide; that was huge. I released in on

Inc.com’s website and that just trickled down to so many

different . . . but that’s what you get out of a big media

placement.

So if you create something of value for a target audience and you

market it effectively to these outlets and you get these

placements, then you just get this trickle down effect of all

these links coming across from people that just syndicate that

content just straight up. That happens from public libraries,

public institutions, private companies all in your industry and

you get requests get a placement in even magazines and print

publication. This guy has been in both and we’ve gotten

requests for both.

And you can just look . . . one of the easiest way to check that is

select maybe a paragraph of text there and throw in a Google

search and you can see how many people straight syndicate that

and you’re looking at hundreds if not thousands of links

everything time you do that. So yeah, the impact of these things

is really big and that’s what we’re seeing in most of the

releases that we’ve done.

Trent: So a couple questions come to mind, first you said you released

it to Inc. Magazine. Can you describe specifically what you mean

by that?

Aaron: Yes, a digital PR effort, the earned media part is probably the

biggest piece in terms of guarantying that you that you get a

lot of links out of that. It’s pitching to an outlet that is an

authoritative industry hilltop that has a lot of your target

audience members reading that publication so whenever this is

placed there, not only get the search engine rankings, you also

get a ton of leads coming in that download that piece; that

value added piece.

That PR digital effort is pitching to them and trying to first get

that first release to somebody and also marketing articles to

the other ones that might not have gotten first release. But if

the piece is valuable enough, then you’re not going to get . . .

it makes the outreach effort a lot easier, let’s say that. Again

those two strategies, the contribution and the earned media, you

really got to be firing on both sides and they’re going to make

each other most successful.

Trent: Okay, so when you reached out to Inc., it’s not like you paid

them. This wasn’t a media buy. You just said, hey, we’ve

produced what we think is a phenomenally valuable piece of

content and we’re going to give you first dips on putting it in

your magazine, mentioning it, linking it, whatever if you deem

it as valuable as we believe it to be. Do I understand this

correctly?

Aaron: Exactly and in doing so we call that climbing the hilltop. And

when climbing hilltops, it’s kind of a future proof way to build

links because it’s done natural. Now we also tell people that

you can’t buy a ticket to the hilltop. If purchasing the links,

first of all, Inc. and any serious publishing wouldn’t even

consider it but some websites do and that’s a practice some,

well, quite a few, people take in trying to get a guest article

posted. They’ll say, hey, I’ll give you $50 to post this on your

blog. It might be middle of the pack domain, authority website

and Google’s attacking that.

[Mad cats] came out last week and said they’re looking specifically

at in shutting down these networks and so as a result whenever

these companies get penalized using that are using tactic they

have to go in an disavow that link. Being from Indiana, I always

have basketball references so pardon me here. It’s kind of like

using a strategy as like taking the ball down the court and

every shot clock ends in a violation. It’s not worth doing at

all. You’ve got to take the other route. Just create something

of value and then you don’t have to pay for it.

I mean consider the effort of those hundreds and sometimes thousands

of links an Inc. article will place out. How long would it take

you to make that manually, to pitch that many companies and what

would you have to pay them? I mean you can’t pitch. It’s really

the best way to scale, link building. It’s a good contribution

and their immediate combination.

Trent: No kidding. So how often are you producing, and Mike Stelzner

is calling this primary fuel, blog posts versus these bigger

reports because obviously it’s a lot more work to produce the

report, the click through rate report, or the blog post

optimization report. So in addition to those reports, actually,

before I move off, how many per year of six months, or how often

are you trying to produce a new report?

Aaron: So we have tier one, two, and three levels of content, so tier

one would be like an e-book, something of that nature, that blog

put out an optimization guide, would probably be considered tier

one. Maybe tier two [good] as a guide. Tier two would be like

cheat sheets, guides, things of that nature, and then tier three

would be just really great guest articles that say you have an

awesome idea to pitch to an industry public publication in just

a really nice well thought, well researched article.

And so we try and do one tier per quarter and then multiple tier two

and tier threes depending on our cycle of editing schedule and

things like that so that’s kind of a good thing to shoot for.

But it’s really not, especially for enterprise clients, it’s not

like it takes a ton of work to create these in some cases

because even in tier one content pieces.

Because there are so many enterprises in the back of their desk

somewhere or maybe sometimes behind a payroll or maybe somewhere

buried on my website they’ve got these false leading pieces and

guides already and sometimes you can just take that and put it

through a more consumable downloadable format, in an e-book or

something like that and then we dress it a little bit.

But a lot of times these companies have tier one content but they

just don’t know it or don’t know how to promote it so that’s a

really great situation coming into. We get a client takes

thought leadership seriously and is creating this somewhere and

we get our PM on it and fast track it. Like I did with the

[CPR] study, I think we spent maybe two guys and less than two

weeks. I know that because we already had the data and we just

crunched the data and wrote maybe a couple thousand words around

it and that was it.

Trent: For the folks that are listening to his if you’re wondering,

I’m browsing Aaron’s site as I’m going the interview and you can

get free reports from him on all this stuff. How to be the

Topic of Your Industry with Earned Media and there’s a download

for that. How to Write Insanely Popular Blog Posts, there’s a

download for that. So I would really encourage you to go to . .

. it looks like it’s Relevance.com. Is that correct, Aaron?

Aaron: Yeah, our website is Relevance.com. You can check the Resources

section and we’ve got . . . it’s all over the map. How to Pass

the Google Analytics IQ Test. That’ll teach you there,

Beginner’s Guide of Google Analytics. Yes, so many ways that we

try to help our target market. Again it’s VP marketing,

directors of marketing do their jobs better and then whenever it

comes around to making decision around digital PR and SEO and

things like that we’re top of mind.

Trent: You know what’s really doing horrible interviews like this for

me is I realize how much more homework I have to do as a result

of talking to you.

Aaron: Well, it’s all there for free.

Trent: All right, so my question that I never got to was, how often do

you blog? And I didn’t mean like you described tier one, two,

three which looks like it’s all content that’s going on other

people’s properties, and then you have your own blog and it

looks like it’s pretty darn active. Two posts in the 20th, one

in the 17th, one in the 16th, two in the 16th. How many people .

. . I mean are you taking guest posts from other people or do

you just have enough people on your team that you guys are able

to crank out this much content?

Aaron: Yes, we have staff of about 80 people here in Indianapolis and

so a lot of these blog contributors, they are all staff. I know

that we have maybe one or two guest posts here and there from

people outside of our company and we do accept guest posts of

their own topic and valuable, just like any other publisher.

But we try to foster blogging for our company within our organization

and I think that’s an important point I’d like to make,

especially with Google Authorship coming. Or it is here and

it’s coming, it’s probably going to be a big part of ranking out

algorithm here soon, but it’s kind of going to . . . [employees

able to] promote themselves, right. So these employees that are

blogging on our website that’s more coverage for their name and

gives them more credit under their Google Authorship profiles.

We want to promote that because it will help us in the end, and even

if they do move on in some point to another organization and

keep doing the same thing, then their [confidence] our website

just only becomes more valuable, so really it’s in the best

interest of the employee and the employer to encourage this

thought leadership and again it helps them and probably even

more than it helps us.

Trent: And how are you ensuring that for example in the case of Rachel

Brown, I see she has two posts. How are you ensuring that the

content that she has authored that is published on your blog is

in Google’s eyes through the authorship of whatever word you’d

like to use is “credited” to Rachel? Is there a plug in or how

does that happen?

Aaron: Yeah, great question, so if you click on that post and you

scroll down to the bottom there is a plug in and it links to

their biography on the site that links to their Twitter account,

Google+. You can see their latest posts so that plug in, I

don’t remember the name of it. I know we run WordPress. I think

it was called Fanciest Author Box. So it will connect your

Google+. Anything that connects your Google+ [inaudible 24:47]

there’s ways of doing it by hand but pay the $5 or $10, maybe

it’s even free. It’s just one click if you’re using WordPress

and you’ve got a connection.

Trent: Okay, Fanciest, and if you’re listening to this I will be at

the end of this interview I’ll describe a link on how you can

get to the show notes for this episode and anything we’ve talked

about like this will be in the show notes. And you’ll be able

to follow those links to get to it.

Fancy, yeah, something called Fancier Author Box by ThematoSoup. So

we’ll check that out and make sure that’s the right one and if

not, I’ll trade some emails with you here and we’ll make sure we

get the right one.

All right, so I now you have to keep this just a half hour so I think

we have about seven minutes left. So obviously you guys are

doing a killer job in terms of getting attention which is a

first phase of lifecycle marketing of course attracting

interest. Phrase two is capturing leads so lots of people are

coming to your site because of all the exposure and these links

and this is helping your ranking and they’re entering their

contact info to get whatever free report which you have many

that they are interested in.

But the next phase is nurturing because just because they download

from a report doesn’t mean that they are ready to become a

customer. So what are some of the things that you do with

you’re a HubSpot partner, yes?

Aaron: Yeah, we use HubSpot. We are a HubSpot [founder].

Trent: So it doesn’t matter for what we’re going to talk about next,

whether you use HubSpot or Infusionsoft or whatever marketing

optimization tool. It wouldn’t matter because you can accomplish

this in all of them. But what are some of the things that you

do to segment and nurture your list of prospects so that your

sales team focuses on the people they should be focusing on?

Aaron: Well, I think, like you said, a lot of marketing automation

software out there could handle quite a bit. I do think HubSpot

does offer definitely some functionalities that others don’t.

But essentially what you want to do is from the very first

gathering their information on a questionnaire form, you want to

understand what questions, and you can get this data from your

service sales people is get prospect questions basically that

can give them an idea if this is someone we want to target and

as a prospect. So it might be a company size, it might be

revenue levels, or numbers of employees, or things of that

nature. Maybe it’s a more in-depth question, but working these

questions into your form that people have to download, fill out

the download your content can help.

Now lengthening that form too long is going to have diminishing

returns with people getting annoyed filling out giant survey but

if you can keep it to a few questions that’s pretty good

practice, and then probably even better information comes

through the software as you start to funnel users through your

marketing automation workflows. So that’ll gives you an idea,

when you send them more resources and more messaging: are they

opening, are they downloading, are they coming back to your

site, what are they looking at when they come back to your site?

Are they filling out the content form?

A good marketing automation software will have all this information

within the portal and ad leads scores as different interactions

happens so you don’t really have to . . . you can set up these

workflows and say they come in through, in our case a blog

optimization guide. We have a specific workflow just for that

because these people are interested in the writing and

authorship and things like that. So people who work through that

funnel and say you have a prospect and say we’re interested in

and they’ve opened up every analysis and downloaded everything

we sent them and they’ve kind of upped their lead score so now

they know more about our company.

At that point, depending on the content that they read, it might be a

time for outreach someone from business development. Now it’s

not that you can send them ten things about your company and

okay once they’ve read ten, then their qualified. You have to be

very tactical with the content that you send them. You’re

starting off at the very top of the funnel when they first find

you and then you work your way down the funnel. So top of the

funnel stuff might be educating them, then about some market or

industry techniques things like that. And the middle of the

funnel might be educating them about those specifics techniques

that your company provides, and maybe it talks about some

comparisons and things like that.

At the bottom of the funnel directly here’s what we do, here’s some

more data, and if you have somebody, a prospect that works

through all that content and downloads it all, then they’re

clearly interested in you, they have been educated on your

company and then outreaching them at that point is not only a

waste of your sale’s guys time but it’s going to be high

prospect, high percentage they are going to close in the end.

Trent: Absolutely, which makes the sales person job easier, lowers

your cost to your customer acquisition, eliminates the need to

waste tons of cold calling and there’s all sorts of benefits. I

think that it’s reasonably likely that lots of people listening

to this don’t necessarily know what auto marketing automation

  1. So I want to feedback on what you just described so I can

make sure folks who aren’t terribly familiar with it really get

a handle on what it is because it’s extremely powerful concept

to embrace and then implement in your business.

So what’s of folks have websites and you can go put in your email

address and you get whatever it is they are offering. But it

sounds to me, Aaron, like what you’re doing of course is you

have not just one lead magnet, but you have many lead magnets

and the follow-up campaigns, which are these sequence of emails

that path down the funnel as it were is going to tailored

obviously to each one of those lead magnets. Am I understanding

this correctly?

Aaron: Exactly.

Trent: Okay. And then at some point down each . . . let’s say if you

have ten lead magnets. Ten different reports, for example, you

would have ten different early stage educational and nurturing

funnels, and then at some point you’re probably have what I call

a catch all product and company specific thick funnel that these

people would eventually make their way into that says “this is

what we do and you can kind of buy our stuff.” Is that correct?

Because I’m thinking of a scale of about how many, of how

manageable that you can make this.

Aaron: Yeah, we have a workflows for every piece that we send out and

all of them in and learning a lot more about our company and

that specific offering that they might have been interested in

more than maybe a different offering we have or different

offering, or different perspective on our offering. Our goal is

to get them to, as what we call, go through the bottom of the

funnel so really what that means is someone again has gone from

leaning about your expertise in the market, to learning about

your company and your offering.

So it doesn’t matter. Like when you sent it to a salesperson and if

you’re like a giant company and you have all these products that

you sell, you obviously want to send people from certain

workflows to the sales guys that handle those. We essentially

sell one thing and that’s the contributions in earned media, so

it’s pretty easy for us because we can export our [inaudible

32:54] through leads and see which workload they are in and get

an idea of what interest drove them to our company and in just

use those as conversation starters and to see if there’s any

interest there. So they all lead to the same thing which is a

high lead score on the bottom of the funnel [website].

Trent: Okay. There’s so much more I could ask you and that I want to

ask you. Excuse me, let make that stop ringing, but you told me

a half hour is all you have, so sadly I’m going to have to cut

this episode off here. I do really want to thank you, Aaron,

for coming and being on the show. Like I say, I’m kind of mad at

your now because I need to read a lot of lead magnets and see

how much better I can do at some of this stuff. For the folks

that are listening who want to get a hold of you, what would be

the easiest way for them to do that?

Aaron: Well, pretty easy: Aaron@revelance.com. That’s my email address

and you can go to relevance.com and see a lot of the guides and

research reports and things of that nature. I think it’s very

helpful for anyone that’s interested in learning more and even

implementing some of these strategies on their team, or their

marketing tam in their company, trying to earn more natural

search engine traffic and leads and social media mentions and

all the great things that earn media contribution provided.

Trent: Absolutely and that’s by the way that’s Aaron with two A’s,

aaron@relevance.com.

Aaron: Yeah. A-A-R-O-N at relevance.com.

Trent: Okay, Aaron, again, thanks you so very much for making the time

to be on the show. It’s been a pleasure to have you on and look

forward to having you back.

Aaron: Yeah, thanks a lot, Trent. It was great fun and I’ll be back

any time.

Trent: Okay, take care.

Aaron: Take care, bye-bye.

Trent: All right, to get to the show notes for today’s episode go to

brightideas.co/64. When you’re there you’ll see all the links

that we’ve talked about today, plus some other valuable

information that you can use to ignite more growth in your

business. If you’re listening to this on your mobile while

you’re driving or doing whatever, just sent a text to, rather

just text Trent to 585858 and I’m going to give you access to

Massive Traffic Toolbox, which is compilation of all the very

best traffic generation strategies that have been shared with me

by my many proven experts and guests here on the show. As well

you’ll be able to get a list of all my favorite episodes that

I’ve published thus far on the blog.

And finally, if you really enjoyed this episode please head over to

brightideas.co/love where we’ll you’ll be able to find a link to

leave us a rating in the iTunes store and I would really

appreciate it if you’d take a moment to do that because it helps

the show to build its audience. And the more audience members

we have, of course, the more people that we can help to

massively boost their business.

So that’s it for this episode. I’m your host Trent Dyrsmid and I look

forward to seeing you in the next episode. Take care and have a

wonderful day.

Announcer: Thanks very much for listening to the Bright Ideas Broadcast.

Check us out on the Web at brightideas.co.

About Aaron Aders

AaronAdersAaron is co-founder of digitalrelevance™, a national leader in inbound marketing, planning and execution. Building on more than a decade of Internet marketing experience, Aaron steers the strategic vision behind digitalrelevance™ marketing strategy, research and collateral. Aaron also maintains a weekly tech column at Inc.com and has contributed content to various national publications including Time.com, Businessweek, Money Magazine, and SmartData Collective – where he also serves on the board of advisors.